Canon | i-SENSYS LBP162dw | User manual | Canon i-SENSYS LBP162dw User manual

Canon i-SENSYS LBP162dw User manual
LBP162dw
User's Guide
USRMA-2771-00 2018-07 en
Copyright CANON INC. 2018
Contents
Important Safety Instructions ...........................................................................................................
Installation
............................................................................................................................................................... 3
Power Supply
Handling
2
............................................................................................................................................................ 5
................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Maintenance and Inspections
Consumables
.................................................................................................................................... 8
............................................................................................................................................................ 9
Setting Up ..........................................................................................................................................................
Main Functions
13
....................................................................................................................................................... 14
Preparations Required Before Use
Preventing Unauthorized Access
........................................................................................................................... 15
.............................................................................................................................. 16
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
............................................................................................................................ 18
Setting the Date/Time .............................................................................................................................................
Setting Up the Network Environment
...................................................................................................................... 22
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
Connecting to a Wired LAN
..................................................................................................................... 24
.................................................................................................................................. 25
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
............................................................................................................................... 26
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
....................................................................................... 28
........................................................................................... 30
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
....................................................................................... 32
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
Checking the SSID and Network Key
Setting IP Addresses
............................................................................................................... 37
..................................................................................................................................... 39
Setting IPv6 Addresses
Viewing Network Settings
.................................................................................................................................. 42
.................................................................................................................................... 45
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
Configuring Printer Ports
Setting Up Print Server
...................................................................................... 47
........................................................................................... 48
............................................................................................................................... 50
.................................................................................................................................. 54
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment
Configuring Ethernet Settings
......................................................................................... 57
........................................................................................................................ 58
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
...................................................................................................... 60
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
.............................................................................................. 61
.......................................................................................................................................... 62
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
Configuring SNTP
Installing Drivers
...................................................................................... 34
........................................................................................................................................... 38
Setting IPv4 Address
Configuring DNS
20
......................................................................................... 66
......................................................................................................................................... 70
.................................................................................................................................................... 72
Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 74
Parts and Their Functions
Front Side
........................................................................................................................................ 76
.......................................................................................................................................................... 77
I
Back Side
........................................................................................................................................................... 79
Multi-Purpose Tray
Drawer
.............................................................................................................................................. 80
.............................................................................................................................................................. 81
Operation Panel
................................................................................................................................................. 82
Turning ON the Machine
......................................................................................................................................... 84
Turning OFF the Machine
Using the Operation Panel
Basic Screens
..................................................................................................................................... 85
....................................................................................................................................... 86
..................................................................................................................................................... 87
Home Screen
............................................................................................................................................... 88
<Status Monitor> Screen
Message Display
Basic Operation
Entering Text
Loading Paper
............................................................................................................................... 89
........................................................................................................................................... 91
.................................................................................................................................................. 92
...................................................................................................................................................... 94
......................................................................................................................................................... 95
Loading Paper in the Drawer
................................................................................................................................ 97
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Loading Envelopes
............................................................................................................. 100
............................................................................................................................................ 102
Loading Preprinted Paper
.................................................................................................................................. 104
Specifying Paper Size and Type
.......................................................................................................................... 106
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer
................................................................................................ 107
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Registering a Custom Paper Size
................................................................................ 108
.................................................................................................................. 110
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
................................................................................................................ 111
Entering Quiet Mode
............................................................................................................................................. 112
Entering Sleep Mode
............................................................................................................................................. 114
Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 116
Printing from a Computer
Canceling Prints
..................................................................................................................................... 117
............................................................................................................................................... 119
Checking the Printing Status and Log
.................................................................................................................. 121
Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 124
Connecting with Mobile Devices
............................................................................................................................ 125
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
............................................................................................................. 127
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
Using AirPrint
........................................................................................ 126
........................................................................................................... 129
....................................................................................................................................................... 130
Printing with AirPrint
........................................................................................................................................ 134
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
Using Google Cloud Print
................................................................................................................................. 137
....................................................................................................................................... 138
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control
....................................................................................................... 140
Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................
Setting Access Privileges
142
....................................................................................................................................... 144
II
Setting the System Manager PIN
Setting a Remote UI PIN
........................................................................................................................ 145
.................................................................................................................................... 147
Configuring the Network Security Settings
............................................................................................................ 149
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
..................................................................................................... 151
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings
.................................................................................................. 152
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings
Changing Port Numbers
Setting a Proxy
.............................................................................................. 155
.................................................................................................................................... 157
................................................................................................................................................. 158
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS
.......................................................................................................... 160
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
Restricting the Machine's Functions
Restricting USB Functions
.................................................................................................. 170
...................................................................................................................... 174
......................................................................................................................... 176
......................................................................................................................................... 177
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
Starting Remote UI
............................................................................................ 178
........................................................................................................................................... 179
............................................................................................................................ 182
Checking the Status and Logs
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
Updating the Firmware
Initializing Settings
...................................................................... 168
.................................................................................................................................. 175
Disabling HTTP Communication
Disabling Remote UI
...................................................................... 162
................................................................................... 165
........................................................................................................... 187
......................................................................................................................................... 190
............................................................................................................................................... 192
Setting Menu List ......................................................................................................................................
195
<Direct Connection>
.............................................................................................................................................. 196
<Network Settings>
.............................................................................................................................................. 197
<Output Reports>
<Preferences>
................................................................................................................................................. 206
....................................................................................................................................................... 207
<Timer Settings>
................................................................................................................................................... 211
<Common Settings>
<Printer Settings>
.............................................................................................................................................. 215
................................................................................................................................................. 217
<Paper Settings for Mobile Print>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
.......................................................................................................................... 227
.................................................................................................................................. 228
<System Management Settings>
............................................................................................................................ 232
Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................
Regular Cleaning
240
.................................................................................................................................................. 242
Cleaning the Exterior
........................................................................................................................................ 243
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
............................................................................................................................. 244
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
............................................................................................................................... 245
Replacing the Drum Cartridge
............................................................................................................................... 248
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
Relocating the Machine
.................................................................................................. 252
......................................................................................................................................... 253
III
Viewing the Counter Value
.................................................................................................................................... 255
..................................................................................................................................... 256
Printing Reports and Lists
........................................................................................................................................................ 258
Consumables
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 262
Common Problems
................................................................................................................................................ 264
........................................................................................................................... 265
Installation/Settings Problems
Printing Problems
............................................................................................................................................. 269
............................................................................................................................ 272
When You Cannot Print Properly
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
Paper Creases or Curls
................................................................................................................... 274
...................................................................................................................................... 283
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
..................................................................................................................................... 285
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed
Countermeasures for Each Message
................................................................................................................... 287
Countermeasures for Each Error Code
Clearing Paper Jams
.................................................................... 286
................................................................................................................ 298
.............................................................................................................................................. 299
Paper Jams inside the Machine
........................................................................................................................... 300
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
......................................................................................................................... 304
Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 306
Third Party Software
Feature Highlights
............................................................................................................................................. 307
................................................................................................................................................ 308
Going Green and Saving Money
Improving Efficiency
So Much More
Specifications
Main Unit
......................................................................................................................................... 311
.................................................................................................................................................. 312
....................................................................................................................................................... 314
........................................................................................................................................................ 315
Available Paper
................................................................................................................................................ 318
Printer Functions
.............................................................................................................................................. 321
Management Functions
System Environment
..................................................................................................................................... 323
......................................................................................................................................... 324
Network Environment
....................................................................................................................................... 325
Manuals and Their Contents
Using User's Guide
.................................................................................................................................. 327
................................................................................................................................................ 328
Screen Layout of User's Guide
Viewing User's Guide
............................................................................................................................ 329
........................................................................................................................................ 332
Basic Windows Operations
Notice
......................................................................................................................... 309
.................................................................................................................................... 334
.................................................................................................................................................................. 342
IV
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions ................................................................................................................... 2
Installation ............................................................................................................................................................ 3
Power Supply ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Handling ................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Maintenance and Inspections .............................................................................................................................. 8
Consumables .......................................................................................................................................................... 9
1
Important Safety Instructions
Important Safety Instructions
29UE-000
The content described in this chapter is for the prevention of damage to property and injury to users of the machine
and others. Before using this machine, read this chapter and follow the instructions to properly use this machine. Do
not perform any operations not described in this manual. Canon will not be responsible for any damages resulting
from use not described in this manual, improper use, or repair/changes not performed by Canon or a third party
authorized by Canon.
Installation(P. 3)
Power Supply(P. 5)
Handling(P. 6)
Maintenance and Inspections(P. 8)
Consumables(P. 9)
2
Important Safety Instructions
Installation
29UE-001
To use this machine safely and comfortably, carefully read the following precautions and install the machine in an
appropriate location.
Do not install in a location that may result in a fire or electrical shock
● A location where the ventilation slots are blocked
(too close to walls, beds, sofas, rugs, or similar objects)
● A damp or dusty location
● A location exposed to direct sunlight or outdoors
● A location subject to high temperatures
● A location exposed to open flames
● Near alcohol, paint thinners or other flammable substances
Other warnings
● Do not connect unapproved cables to this machine. Doing so may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not place necklaces and other metal objects or containers filled with liquid on the machine. If foreign
substances come in contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not use near medical equipment. Radio waves emitted from this machine may interfere with medical
equipment, which may result in malfunctions and accidents.
● If any foreign substance falls into this machine, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet and
contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
Do not install in the following locations
● The machine may drop or fall, resulting in injury.
- An unstable location
- A location exposed to vibrations
Other cautions
● When carrying this machine, follow the instructions in this manual. If carried improperly, it may fall, resulting
in injury.
● When installing this machine, be careful not to get your hands caught between the machine and the floor or
walls. Doing so may result in injury.
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
● This machine generates a slight amount of ozone and other emissions during normal use. These emissions
are not harmful to health. However, they may be noticeable during extended use or long production runs in
3
Important Safety Instructions
poorly ventilated rooms. To maintain a comfortable working environment, it is recommended that the room
where the machine operates be appropriately ventilated. Also avoid locations where people would be
exposed to emissions from the machine.
Do not install in the following locations that may result in damage
● A location subject to dramatic changes in temperature or
humidity
● A location near equipment that generates magnetic or
electromagnetic waves
● A laboratory or location where chemical reactions occur
● A location exposed to corrosive or toxic gases
● A location that may warp from the weight of the machine or
where the machine is liable to sink (a carpet, etc.)
Do not install in a location where condensation occurs
● Water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine when the room where the machine is installed
is heated rapidly, and when the machine is moved from a cool or dry location to a hot or humid location.
Using the machine under these conditions may result in paper jams, poor print quality, or damage to the
machine. Let the machine adjust to the ambient temperature and humidity for at least 2 hours before use.
In altitudes of above sea level 3,000 m or higher
● Machines with a hard disk may not operate properly when used at high altitudes of about 3,000 meters
above sea level, or higher.
4
Important Safety Instructions
Power Supply
29UE-002
● Use only a power supply that meets the specified voltage requirements. Failure to do so may result in a fire
or electrical shock.
● The machine must be connected to a socket-outlet with grounding connection by the provided power cord.
● Do not use power cords other than the one provided, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● The provided power cord is intended for use with this machine. Do not connect the power cord to other
devices.
● Do not modify, pull, forcibly bend, or perform any other act that may damage the power cord. Do not place
heavy objects on the power cord. Damaging the power cord may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Do not plug in or unplug the power plug with wet hands, as this may result in an electrical shock.
● Do not use extension cords or multi-plug power strips with the machine. Doing so may result in a fire or
electrical shock.
● Do not wrap the power cord or tie it in a knot, as this may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Insert the power plug completely into the AC power outlet. Failure to do so may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● Remove the power plug completely from the AC power outlet during a thunder storm. Failure to do so may
result in a fire, electrical shock, or damage to the machine.
● Install this machine near the power outlet and leave sufficient space around the power plug so that it can be
unplugged easily in an emergency.
When connecting power
● Do not connect the power cord to an uninterruptible power source. Doing so may result in malfunction of or
damage to the machine at power failure.
● If you plug this machine into an AC power outlet with multiple sockets, do not use the remaining sockets to
connect other devices.
● Do not connect the power cord to the auxiliary AC power outlet on a computer.
Other precautions
● Electrical noise may cause this machine to malfunction or lose data.
5
Important Safety Instructions
Handling
29UE-003
● Immediately unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet
and contact an authorized Canon dealer if the machine makes
an unusual noise, emits an unusual smell, or emits smoke or
excessive heat. Continued use may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● Do not disassemble or modify this machine. There are highvoltage and high-temperature components inside the machine
which may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Place the machine where children will not come in contact with the power cord and other cables or internal
and electrical parts. Failure to do so may result in unexpected accidents.
● Do not use flammable sprays near this machine. If flammable substances come into contact with electrical
parts inside this machine, it may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● When moving this machine, be sure to turn OFF the power of this machine and your computer, and then
unplug the power plug and interface cables. Failure to do so may damage the power cord or interface
cables, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
● When plugging or unplugging a USB cable when the power plug is plugged into an AC power outlet, do not
touch the metal part of the connector, as this may result in an electrical shock.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
● This machine generates a low level magnetic flux and ultrasonic waves. If you use a cardiac pacemaker and
feel abnormalities, please move away from this machine and consult your physician immediately.
● Do not place heavy objects on this machine as they may fall, resulting in injury.
● For your safety, please unplug the power cord if the machine will not be used for a long period of time.
● Use caution when opening and closing covers to avoid injury to your hands.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the rollers in the output area. If the rollers catch your hands or clothing,
this may result in personal injury.
● The inside of the machine and the output slot are very hot during and immediately after use. Avoid contact
with these areas to prevent burns. Also, printed paper may be hot immediately after being output, so use
caution when handling it. Failure to do so may result in burns.
6
Important Safety Instructions
Laser beam
● If the laser beam should escape and enter your eyes, exposure may cause damage to your eyes.
When transporting the machine
● To prevent damage to the machine during transport, perform the following.
- Remove the toner cartridges and the drum cartridges.
- Securely pack the machine in the original box with packing materials.
If the operating noise concerns you
● Depending on the use environment and operating mode, if the operating noise is of concern, it is
recommended that the machine be installed in a place other than the office.
Other precautions
● Follow the instructions in the caution label attached to this machine.
● Avoid shaking or applying shock to this machine.
● Do not forcibly open and close doors, covers, and other parts. Doing so may result in damage to the
machine.
● Do not touch the contacts (
) inside the machine. Doing so may result in damage to the machine.
● To prevent a paper jam, do not turn OFF the power, open/close the covers, and load/unload the paper when
printing.
7
Important Safety Instructions
Maintenance and Inspections
29UE-004
Clean this machine periodically. If dust accumulates, the machine may not operate properly. When cleaning, be sure to
observe the following. If a problem occurs during operation, see Troubleshooting(P. 262) . If the problem cannot
be resolved or you feel the machine requires an inspection, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 304) .
● Before cleaning, turn OFF the power and unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet. Failure to do so
may result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Unplug the power plug periodically and clean with a dry cloth to remove dust and grime. Accumulated dust
may absorb humidity in the air and may result in a fire if it comes into contact with electricity.
● Use a damp, well wrung-out cloth to clean the machine. Dampen cleaning cloths with water only. Do not use
alcohol, benzine, paint thinner, or other flammable substances. Do not use tissue paper or paper towels. If
these substances come into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, they may generate static
electricity or result in a fire or electrical shock.
● Check the power cord and plug periodically for damage. Check the machine for rust, dents, scratches,
cracks, or excessive heat generation. Use of poorly-maintained equipment may result in a fire or electrical
shock.
● The inside of the machine has high-temperature and high-voltage components. Touching these components
may result in burns. Do not touch any part of the machine that is not indicated in the manual.
● When loading paper or removing jammed paper, be careful not to cut your hands with the edges of the
paper.
● When removing jammed paper or replacing toner cartridges or the like, be careful not to get any toner on
your hands or clothing. If toner gets on your hands or clothing, wash them immediately with cold water.
8
Important Safety Instructions
Consumables
29UE-005
● Do not dispose of used toner cartridges or the like in open flames. Also, do not store toner cartridges, drum
cartridges, or paper in a location exposed to open flames. This may cause the toner to ignite, and result in
burns or fire.
● If you accidentally spill or scatter toner, carefully gather the toner particles together or wipe them up with a
soft, damp cloth in a way that prevents inhalation. Never use a vacuum cleaner that does not have
safeguards against dust explosions to clean up spilled toner. Doing so may cause a malfunction in the
vacuum cleaner, or result in a dust explosion due to static discharge.
If you are using a cardiac pacemaker
● The toner cartridge generates a low level magnetic flux. If you are using a cardiac pacemaker and feel
abnormalities, please move away from the toner cartridge and consult your physician immediately.
● Use caution not to inhale any toner. If you should inhale toner, consult a physician immediately.
● Use caution so that toner does not get into your eyes or mouth. If toner should get into your eyes or mouth,
immediately wash with cold water and consult a physician.
● Use caution so that toner does not come into contact with your skin. If it should, wash with soap and cold
water. If there is any irritation on your skin, consult a physician immediately.
● Keep the toner cartridges and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested,
consult a physician or poison control center immediately.
● Do not disassemble or modify the toner cartridge or the like. Doing so may cause the toner to scatter.
Handling the toner cartridge
● Be sure to hold the toner cartridge using the handle.
● Do not touch the toner feed section (
), the electrical contacts (
9
) or the toner cartridge memory (
).
Important Safety Instructions
● Except when necessary, do not take out the toner cartridge from the packing material or from this machine.
● The toner cartridge is a magnetic product. Do not move it close to products susceptible to magnetism
including floppy disks and disk drives. Doing so may result in data corruption.
Handling the drum cartridge
● Be sure to hold the drum cartridge using the handle.
● To avoid scratching the surface of the drum inside the machine or exposing it to light, do not open the drum
protective shutter (
). Do not touch the electrical contacts (
) or the drum cartridge memory (
).
● Except when necessary, do not take out the drum cartridge from the packing material or from this machine.
Storing the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge
● Store in the following environment to ensure safe and satisfactory use.
Storage temperature range: 0 to 35°C
Storage humidity range: 35 to 85% RH (relative humidity/no condensation)*
● Store without opening until the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge is to be used.
● When removing the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge from this machine for storage, place the removed
toner cartridge or drum cartridge in the original packing material.
● When storing the toner cartridge, do not store it upright or upside down. The toner will solidify and may not
return to its original condition even if it is shaken.
10
Important Safety Instructions
*Even within the storable humidity range, water droplets (condensation) may develop inside the toner cartridge or the drum
cartridge if there is a difference of temperature inside and outside the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge. Condensation
will adversely affect the print quality of toner cartridges or drum cartridges.
Do not store the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge in the following locations
● Locations exposed to open flames
● Locations exposed to direct sunlight or bright light for five minutes or more
● Locations exposed to excessive salty air
● Locations where there are corrosive gases (i.e. aerosol sprays and ammonia)
● Locations subject to high temperature and high humidity
● Locations subject to dramatic changes in temperature and humidity where condensation may easily occur
● Locations with a large amount of dust
● Locations within the reach of children
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges or drum cartridges
● Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges or Canon drum cartridges in the
marketplace. Use of counterfeit toner cartridge or drum cartridge may result in poor print quality or
machine performance. Canon is not responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use
of counterfeit toner cartridge or drum cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.
Availability period of repairing parts, toner cartridges, drum cartridges and the like
● The repairing parts, toner cartridges, drum cartridges and the like for the machine will be available for at
least seven (7) years after production of this machine model has been discontinued.
Packing materials for the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge
● Save the packing materials for the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge. They are required when
transporting this machine.
● The packing materials may be changed in form or placement, or may be added or removed without notice.
When disposing of a used toner cartridge, drum cartridge or the like
● When discarding a toner cartridge, drum cartridge or the like, place it in the original packing material to
prevent toner from scattering from inside, and dispose of it in accordance with the applicable local
regulations.
11
Setting Up
Setting Up
Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................. 13
Main Functions .................................................................................................................................................... 14
Preparations Required Before Use ..................................................................................................................... 15
Preventing Unauthorized Access ........................................................................................................................ 16
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ...................................................................................................................... 18
Setting the Date/Time ......................................................................................................................................... 20
Setting Up the Network Environment ............................................................................................................... 22
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................. 24
Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 25
Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 26
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ............................................................................. 28
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode .................................................................................. 30
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 32
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................ 34
Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 37
Setting IP Addresses ....................................................................................................................................... 38
Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................ 39
Setting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................................................................ 42
Viewing Network Settings ............................................................................................................................... 45
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer ............................................................................ 47
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ................................................................................. 48
Configuring Printer Ports ......................................................................................................................... 50
Setting Up Print Server ............................................................................................................................ 54
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................... 57
Configuring Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................................. 58
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ............................................................................................. 60
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................... 61
Configuring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 62
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 66
Configuring SNTP .................................................................................................................................... 70
Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 72
12
Setting Up
Setting Up
29UE-006
Before using the functions of the machine, the environmental conditions must be set in advance. To begin with, check
the sequences of flow required to complete the setup, and then perform the actual settings. Preparations Required
Before Use(P. 15)
● The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you purchased. Before using the
machine, see Main Functions(P. 14) and check the available functions.
Configuring Initial Settings of the Machine (Setup Guide)
● You can easily configure the initial settings required to use the machine, such as date, time, and network
settings, by following the on-screen guidance. Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 18)
13
Setting Up
Main Functions
29UE-007
This manual covers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions
are available on the model you purchased.
: With function
: Without function
Function
Display
LBP162dw
Black and white LCD
2-sided printing
Wired LAN
Wireless LAN
Direct Connection
Remote UI
Default System Manager PIN
Not specified
● For the available driver types, see the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see the Canon
website (http://www.canon.com/).
LINKS
Viewing User's Guide(P. 332)
14
Setting Up
Preparations Required Before Use
29UE-008
Set up the machine following steps 1 to 3 in order. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go
to the corresponding section. In addition, to use the machine safely, also check Preventing Unauthorized
Access(P. 16) .
Step 1
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 18)
Step 2
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 22)
● Configure the network settings that are not covered in the Setup Guide. If you do not need
to use the Setup Guide, configure the network settings from here.
Step 3
Installing Drivers(P. 72)
Setting from the Remote UI
● When the network environment settings are complete, you can efficiently set the machine from a computer
using Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 179)
15
Setting Up
Preventing Unauthorized Access
29UE-009
This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is
a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines
connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a
variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,
and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to
reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to
threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary
settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected
to the network.
Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network
Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 16)
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 17)
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 17)
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Machine(P. 17)
Assigning a Private IP Address
An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is
used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication
within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/
multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage
due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,
your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local
area network, such as a LAN in the company.
Global IP Address
Can be accessed from the external network
Private IP Address
Can be accessed from the users within a local area network
Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to confirm the IP address,
assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is
found in one of the following ranges.
Ranges for Private IP addresses
● From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
● From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
● From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
For information on how to confirm the IP address, see
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39) .
● If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment
to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a firewall that prevents
16
Setting Up
access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/
multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.
Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission
A firewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/
intrusions to a local area network. You can use a firewall on your network environment to block access from the
external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specified IP address of the
external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP
address filter. For information on how to set up an IP address filter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall
Settings(P. 152) .
Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication
For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Configuring the Network Security Settings(P. 149) ,
and on the procedures to specify, see Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160) .
Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Machine
If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to
information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines
enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.
Setting PIN to Each Function
● Setting PIN for Using Remote UI
For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 147) .
● Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings
For more information, see
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145) .
Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on
the other security measures, see Managing the Machine(P. 142) and take necessary security measures for
preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.
17
Setting Up
Setting Up Using the Setup Guide
29UE-00A
When the machine is turned on ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 84) ) for the first time, the Setup Guide starts up to
assist you to configure the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the
setting screens are displayed in the following order.
Step 1
Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region
Set the language to be displayed on the operation panel screen or in reports, as well as the
country or region where the machine will be used.
Step 2
1
Select a language.
2
Select a country or region.
Setting the Date and Time
Adjust the machine's date/time.
1
Select a time zone.
What is UTC?
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the
world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required
for Internet communications.
2
Step 3
Enter the date and time, and press
.
Setting the Access Security Measures
Set a PIN to access the Remote UI. Because the Remote UI can be used to change the machine
settings from a computer, setting of a PIN is recommended.
1
Select <Yes>.
● If you select <No>, PIN is not set, and the Setup Guide proceeds to step 3.
● You can also set the access security measure of the Remote UI later.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 147)
Step 4
2
Enter the PIN, and then select <Apply>.
3
Enter the same PIN, and then select <Apply>.
Setting the Wireless LAN
Configure the settings to connect to the network using the wireless LAN.
1
Select <Yes>.
● Select <No> to finish the Setup Guide without configuring the wireless LAN
settings. Read the displayed message, and press
2
Select <OK>.
3
Select the setting method.
.
● For more information about the wireless LAN settings, see
Wireless LAN(P. 26) .
18
Connecting to a
Setting Up
4
Read the message that is displayed, and press
.
➠ When the Setup Guide is complete, the Home screen appears.
19
Setting Up
Setting the Date/Time
29UE-00C
Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time are used as the reference for the functions specifying the
time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.
Setting the Time Zone(P. 20)
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 20)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time(P. 21)
Setting the Time Zone
If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Timer Settings>
3
Select the time zone.
Home Screen(P. 88)
<Date/Time Settings>
<Time Zone>.
What is UTC?
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and
time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC
time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
Setting the Current Date and Time
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Timer Settings>
3
Enter the date and time.
● Use
or
Home Screen(P. 88)
<Date/Time Settings>
<Current Date/Time Settings>.
to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using
20
or
.
Setting Up
4
Press
.
● Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed later, the
current date and time are also changed accordingly.
● The display format of the date and time can be changed, respectively.
<Date Format>(P. 211)
<Time Format>(P. 212)
Setting the Daylight Saving Time
If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Timer Settings>
3
Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
<Date/Time Settings>
<Daylight Saving Time Settings>.
● When you select <On>, proceed to step 4.
4
Set the month and day for the start date, and then select <Apply>.
● To set the day, specify "what day of which week."
5
Set the month and day for the end date, and then select <Apply>.
● To set the day, specify "what day of which week."
21
Setting Up
Setting Up the Network Environment
29UE-00E
When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to
the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking
devices. For specific IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
● If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third
party.
● The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.
● The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.
● For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact
your manufacturer.
◼ Before You Start
Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.
Check your computer settings.
● Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more
information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the
device manufacturers.
● Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the
network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the
network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.
● Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication
method or the Ethernet type ( Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 58) ). For more
information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.
● To check the MAC address of the machine.
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 45)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 46)
22
Setting Up
● To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see
Authentication Settings(P. 170) .
Configuring IEEE 802.1X
Select wired or wireless LAN.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 24)
Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.
● Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 25)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
Set the IP address as necessary.
● At the time of purchase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.
Change this setting if you want to use a specific IP address. Setting IP
Addresses(P. 38)
LINKS
Configuring Settings for Communication with a Computer(P. 47)
Configuring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 57)
23
Setting Up
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN
29UE-00F
After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN
using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you
will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the
manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.
4
Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 22)
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 25)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
24
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Setting Up
Connecting to a Wired LAN
29UE-00H
Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.
1
Connect a LAN cable.
● Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.
● Push the connector in until it clicks into place.
2
Wait for several minutes.
➠ The IP address is set automatically.
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 38)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 22)
25
Setting Up
Connecting to a Wireless LAN
29UE-00J
Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is
equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), configuring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking
devices do not support automatic configuration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in
detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the
network.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 26)
Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 27)
Risk of information leak
● Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an
unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in
wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.
Wireless LAN security
● The wireless LAN function of this machine supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. For the wireless security
compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact
your manufacturer.
Required devices for wireless LAN connection
● The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS
When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.
◼ Push Button Mode
Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on
your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 28)
26
Setting Up
◼ PIN Code Mode
Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in
the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 30)
● If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.
Manually Setting Up Connection
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required
information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID
and network key. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
◼ Selecting a Wireless Router
Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as
possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 32)
◼ Manually Entering the Setup Information
If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the
SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
LINKS
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 22)
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 24)
27
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode
29UE-00K
If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.
● How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.
6
Select <Yes>.
7
Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.
● The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 6.
● Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.
See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close> and return to step 5.
8
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
28
Setting Up
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 38)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 88)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 198)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
29
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode
29UE-00L
If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to
the networking device.
● How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your
networking device for help.
From a Computer
1
Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a
WPS PIN code.
● For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.
From the Operation Panel
2
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
3
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
4
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
5
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
6
Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.
7
Select <Yes>.
➠ The PIN code is generated and shown on the display.
From a Computer
8
Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.
● Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.
30
Setting Up
● The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 7.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close> and return to step 6.
From the Operation Panel
9
Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 38)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 88)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 198)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
31
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router
29UE-00R
You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the
machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the
required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37) ).
Security settings
● If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to
<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to
select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up
the connection using <Enter Manually>. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>.
6
Select <Select Access Point>.
➠ The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.
● If a message is displayed telling that access point cannot be found, see
Message(P. 287) .
7
Countermeasures for Each
Select a wireless LAN router.
● Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down, and press
32
.
Setting Up
If your wireless router is not found
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Settings Problems(P. 265)
8
Installation/
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
9
Entering Text(P. 94) .
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close>, check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.
10
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 38)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 88)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 198)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
33
Setting Up
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings
29UE-00S
If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other
procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed
settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security
protocols. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
● If the <Direct Connection will be disabled. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <SSID Settings>
6
Enter the SSID that you have written down.
<Enter Manually>.
● Enter the SSID, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
7
Entering Text(P. 94) .
Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.
● If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>.
Using WEP
1
Select <WEP>.
2
Select an authentication method.
<Open System>
34
Setting Up
Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."
<Shared Key>
Uses the WEP key as a password.
When <Open System> is selected
● When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key
authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the
setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.
3
Select the WEP key you want to edit.
● Select <Edit WEP Key>
WEP key (1 to 4).
● Up to four WEP keys can be registered.
4
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
5
Select the desired WEP key.
● Select <Select WEP Key>
select the WEP key you have edited.
Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
1
Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.
2
Select an encryption method.
<Auto>
Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.
<AES-CCMP>
Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.
3
Enter the network key that you have written down.
● Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.
8
Select <Yes>.
If an error message is displayed during setup
● Select <Close>, check whether the specified settings are correct, and return to step 5.
9
Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.
➠ Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.
35
Setting Up
Signal strength
● When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device
with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).
● You can set the IP address manually.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 38)
● While the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 88)
Reducing power consumption
● You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Power Save Mode>(P. 198)
If the IP address of the machine has changed
● In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the
connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
36
Setting Up
Checking the SSID and Network Key
29UE-00U
When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.
The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the
necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
SSID
A name given for identifying a specific wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include
"access point name" and "network name."
Network Key
A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other
terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"
and "preshared key (PSK)."
Wireless Security Protocols
(Authentication/Encryption)
When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to
specify security settings. Check the following information:
● Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)
● Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)
● Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
◼ Checking the SSID and Network Key from a Computer
The SSID or the network key may have been changed. If you do not know the SSID or the network key, you can check
them by using the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant." Download the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant"
from the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/), and start it up from a computer connected to a wireless LAN.
● If no access point is displayed on the screen after startup of the "Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant,"
check if the setup is completed both on the computer and the wireless LAN router.
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 32)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
37
Setting Up
Setting IP Addresses
29UE-00W
Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are
available: IPv4 and IPv6. Configure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you
need to properly configure the IPv4 address settings.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 42)
38
Setting Up
Setting IPv4 Address
29UE-00X
The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP
addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the
machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are firmly
inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 25) ). You can test the
network connection if necessary.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39)
Testing the Network Connection(P. 40)
Setting IPv4 Address
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Configure IP address settings.
<IPv4 Settings>
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
<IP Address Settings>.
<Auto Acquire>
Select to automatically assign an IP address via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic
addressing is enabled.
<Manually Acquire>
Select to configure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option,
the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.
<Check Settings>
Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.
Automatically assigning an IP address
1
Select <Auto Acquire>.
2
Select the protocol.
● Select <Select Protocol>
<DHCP>.
If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address
39
Setting Up
● Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services are unavailable, the machine will waste time
and communications resources searching the network for these services.
3
Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.
● If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.
4
Select <Apply>.
● IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.
Manually entering an IP address
1
Configure a setting to disable auto-acquisition.
● Select <Auto Acquire>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.
2
Select <Manually Acquire>.
3
Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).
● Enter these values in each screen, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 94) .
Checking whether the settings are correct
● Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote
UI(P. 179) ). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel (
Testing the Network Connection(P. 40) ).
When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
● When the MFNP port is used, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong
to the same subnet; therefore, you do not need to add a new port. When the standard TCP/IP port is used,
you need to add a new port. Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
*If
you do not know which port is used, see
Checking the Printer Port(P. 338) .
Testing the Network Connection
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and select <Apply>.
<IPv4 Settings>
<PING Command>.
➠ If a proper connection has been established, <Received response from host.> is displayed.
40
Setting Up
LINKS
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 42)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
41
Setting Up
Setting IPv6 Addresses
29UE-00Y
The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be configured via the Remote UI. Before
setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4
Settings(P. 45) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.
The machine can use the following multiple IPv6 addresses:
Type
Description
Link-local address
An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with
devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the
machine is enabled.
Manual address
An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prefix length and default
router address.
Stateless address
An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network
prefix that is advertised by the router. Stateless addresses are discarded when the machine is
restarted (or turned ON).
Stateful address
An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
5
Select the [Use IPv6] check box and configure the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[TCP/IP Settings].
42
Setting Up
[Use IPv6]
Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.
[Use Stateless Address]
Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.
[Use Manual Address]
When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prefix
length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.
[IP Address]
Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) and the loopback address (::1)
cannot be entered.
[Prefix Length]
Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.
[Default Router Address]
Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) and the loopback address (::1) cannot be entered.
[Use DHCPv6]
Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.
6
Click [OK].
Checking whether the settings are correct
● Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the
machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 179)
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● IPv6 settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
43
<IPv6 Settings>(P. 201)
Setting Up
When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver
● You need to add a new port.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
44
Setting Up
Viewing Network Settings
29UE-010
Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 45)
Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 45)
Viewing Direct Connection Information(P. 45)
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 45)
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 46)
● The IP address is not correctly configured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".
● Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP
address is correctly configured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine
starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 61)
● You can print a list of the current network settings.
User Data List(P. 256)
Viewing IPv4 Settings
<Status Monitor>
settings
<Network Information>
<IPv4>
Select the setting to view
Check the
<Network Information>
<IPv6>
Select the setting to view
Check the
Viewing IPv6 Settings
<Status Monitor>
settings
Viewing Direct Connection Information
<Status Monitor> <Network Information>
Details> Check the settings
<Direct Connection Information>
Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
45
<Connection
Setting Up
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.
➠ MAC address is displayed.
Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
3
Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.
4
Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.
5
Select <Wireless LAN Information>.
6
Select the setting to view.
Viewing security information
● To view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, use the following procedure.
<Security Settings>
Select the displayed security protocol
Select the setting to view
Viewing from the <Status Monitor> screen
● <Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from <Status Monitor>.
<Status Monitor> <Network Information>
Information> Select the setting to view
<Network Connection Method>
LINKS
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 42)
Configuring DNS(P. 62)
46
<Connection
Setting Up
Configuring Settings for Communication with a
Computer
29UE-011
Specify the protocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before configuring the
machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures. For more information, see the manuals
for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 48)
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
Setting Up Print Server(P. 54)
● Protocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and
can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.
● Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the
network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.
47
Setting Up
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions
29UE-012
Configure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Network Settings]
4
Configure printing protocols.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[TCP/IP Settings].
Configuring LPD or RAW
1
Click [Edit] in [LPD Print Settings] or [RAW Print Settings].
2
Configure the settings as necessary.
[Use LPD Printing]
Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.
[Use RAW Printing]
Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.
3
Click [OK].
Configuring WSD
1
Click [Edit] in [WSD Settings].
2
Configure the settings as necessary.
48
Setting Up
[Use WSD Printing]
Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.
[Use WSD Browsing]
Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is
automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.
[Use Multicast Discovery]
Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is
cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are flowing on the
network.
3
Click [OK].
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<LPD Print Settings>(P. 202)
<RAW Print Settings>(P. 202)
<WSD Settings>(P. 202)
Setting up WSD network devices
● The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying the
Printer Folder(P. 334) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For
more information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant
drivers on the online manual website.
To change the port number
● The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 157)
LINKS
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
49
Setting Up
Configuring Printer Ports
29UE-013
Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via
the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an
incorrect port number or port type may have been specified. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the
document data cannot reach the machine. To fix this type of problem, configure the printer port settings on the
computer.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
1
Open the printer folder.
2
Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
3
Click the [Ports] tab and configure the required settings.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 334)
[Properties].
Adding a port
If you have changed the IP address of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing
drivers from the Windows printer folder, add a new port. There are two types of port: "MFNP Port" and
"Standard TCP/IP Port." Select the port type according to your environment.
MFNP Port
(only for IPv4 environment)
This is a port that allows the IP address of the machine to be detected automatically.
Even if the IP address of the machine is changed, the connection is maintained,
provided that the machine and the computer are in the same subnet. You do not need
to add a new port every time the IP address is changed. If you are using the machine
in an IPv4 environment, you should normally select this type of port.
● You can add an MFNP port only when you installed the driver from the provided
CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, or when you downloaded and installed the printer driver from
the Canon website.
50
Setting Up
Standard TCP/IP Port
This is a standard Windows port. When you use this type of port, you need to add a
new port every time that the IP address of the machine is changed. Select this type of
port when you are using the machine in an IPv6 environment and when you cannot
add an MFNP port.
Adding an MFNP port
1
Click [Add Port].
2
Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3
Select [Auto Detect] and select the machine when it is detected, and then click [Next].
If the machine is not detected
● Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, select [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or
MAC address of the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 45) ) and then click [Next].
4
Click [Add]
5
Click [Close].
[Finish].
Adding a standard TCP/IP port
1
Click [Add Port].
2
Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].
3
Click [Next].
4
Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].
● The [Port Name] is entered automatically. If necessary, you can change it.
51
Setting Up
● When the next screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.
*When
you select the [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].
5
Click [Finish].
6
Click [Close].
Changing the port type or number
If the printing protocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side ( Configuring Printing
Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 48) ) or the port number has been changed ( Changing Port
Numbers(P. 157) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be configured. This operation is
not needed for WSD ports.
MFNP port
1
Click [Configure Port].
2
Under [Protocol Type], select [RAW] or [LPR], and change the [Port Number].
3
Click [OK].
Standard TCP/IP port
1
Click [Configure Port].
2
Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].
52
Setting Up
● If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].
● If you selected [LPR], enter "lp" in [Queue Name].
3
4
Click [OK].
Click [Close].
LINKS
Setting Up Print Server(P. 54)
53
Setting Up
Setting Up Print Server
29UE-014
With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it
possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers
on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server,
configure the settings for sharing the printer.
● To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.
● You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit
architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.
● When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.
1
2
3
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 334)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the
machine.
● Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.
4
Install additional drivers as necessary.
● This operation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit
architecture via the print server.
1
Click [Additional Drivers].
2
Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].
54
Setting Up
● Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.
Print server
Select the check box for
32-bit operating systems
[x64]
64-bit operating systems
[x86] under [Processor]
● If you do not know whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 337) .
3
4
5
Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder
that contains the drivers, and then click [OK].
● If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [UFRII]
on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
[uk_eng]
[x64]
● If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [UFRII]
folders on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.
[uk_eng]
[32BIT]
[Driver] folders
[Driver]
Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.
Click [OK].
◼ Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server
1
Locate the shared printer in the print server.
2
Double-click the shared printer.
3
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.
Displaying Shared Printers in the
Print Server(P. 335)
LINKS
55
Setting Up
Printing from a Computer(P. 117)
56
Setting Up
Configuring the Machine for Your Network
Environment
29UE-015
The configuration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to
be compatible with as many network configurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.
Consult your Network Administrator and set a configuration to suit your network environment.
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 58)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 60)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 61)
Configuring DNS(P. 62)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 66)
Configuring SNTP(P. 70)
57
Setting Up
Configuring Ethernet Settings
29UE-016
Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can set
the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In general, the machine can be used
without changing the defaults ( <Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 205) ), but you can
change these settings to suit your network environment.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
3
Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>
4
Select whether to configure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.
<Auto Detect>.
● If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode
and the type that can be used.
Configuring Ethernet settings automatically
Select <On> in <Auto Detect>.
Configuring Ethernet settings manually
1
Configure a setting to disable Auto Detect.
Select <Off> in <Auto Detect>.
2
<Communication Mode>
select the communication mode.
<Half Duplex>
Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a
networking device using half duplex.
<Full Duplex>
58
Setting Up
Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.
3
<Ethernet Type>
4
Select <Apply>.
select the Ethernet type.
LINKS
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 60)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 61)
59
Setting Up
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit
29UE-017
In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of
data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each
network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Select the MTU.
<MTU Size>.
LINKS
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 58)
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 61)
60
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Setting Up
Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network
29UE-018
When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a
mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to define the role of each switch port. However,
communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network
devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the
network.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
3
Select <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>.
4
Enter the waiting time required to start a communication with the network, and
press
.
LINKS
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 58)
Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 60)
61
Setting Up
Configuring DNS
29UE-019
DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP
address. Configure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for configuring
DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click [Network Settings]
4
Configure DNS settings.
[TCP/IP Settings].
Configuring IPv4 DNS
1
Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].
2
Configure IPv4 DNS settings.
62
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
Setting Up
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS
Dynamic Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the
[mDNS Name] text box.
[DHCP Option Settings]
[Acquire Host Name]
Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP
server.
3
Click [OK].
Configuring IPv6 DNS
1
Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].
2
Configure IPv6 DNS settings.
● The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to configure the settings.
63
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 42)
Setting Up
[DNS Settings]
[Primary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be
entered.
[Secondary DNS Server Address]
Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast
address) cannot be entered.
[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.
[Host Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS
server.
[Domain Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as
"example.com."
[DNS Dynamic Update]
Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is
changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the
check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless
Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic
Update Interval] text box.
[mDNS Settings]
[Use mDNS]
Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP
address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.
[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]
Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the
check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.
3
Click [OK].
Selecting settings from the operation panel
● DNS settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
64
Setting Up
<IPv4 Settings>(P. 200)
<IPv6 Settings>(P. 201)
LINKS
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39)
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 42)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
65
Setting Up
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP
29UE-01A
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a
network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced
SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.
You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your
network environment and the purpose of use.
SNMPv1
SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to define the scope of SNMP communication. Because this
information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to
ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.
SNMPv3
With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.
Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before configuring SNMPv3 ( Configuring the Key and
Certificate for TLS(P. 160) ).
● The machine does not support the trap notification feature of SNMP.
● To change the port number of SNMP, see
Changing Port Numbers(P. 157) .
● SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to configure,
monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction
manuals for your management software.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
[SNMP Settings].
66
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
Setting Up
5
Specify SNMPv1 settings.
● If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.
[Use SNMPv1]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]
Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear
the check box.
[Community Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.
[MIB Access Permission]
For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write]
Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only]
Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Use Dedicated Community]
Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software.
Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access Permission]. If you do not need to
use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.
6
Specify SNMPv3 settings.
● If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.
67
Setting Up
[Use SNMPv3]
Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box
is selected.
[Enable User]
Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,
clear the corresponding check box.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[MIB Access Permission]
Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.
[Read/Write]
Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.
[Read Only]
Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.
[Security Settings]
Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/
Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.
[Authentication Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for [Security Settings] for
the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.
[Encryption Algorithm]
Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] for [Security Settings] for the algorithm that corresponds to your
environment.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in
the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For confirmation, enter the same password
in the [Confirm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.
[Context Name 1]/[Context Name 2]/[Context Name 3]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the context name. Up to three context names can be registered.
7
Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.
68
Setting Up
● With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be
monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.
[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]
Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.
To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.
8
Click [OK].
Disabling SNMPv1
● If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine
information via the printer driver.
Using the operation panel
● You can also specify SNMPv1 settings and enable/disable SNMPv3 settings from <Menu>.
Settings>(P. 203)
<SNMP
Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3
● If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to
[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in
SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features
that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160)
69
Setting Up
Configuring SNTP
29UE-01C
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.
If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specified intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be
maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before
configuring SNTP ( Setting the Date/Time (P. 20) ). SNTP settings can be specified via the Remote UI.
● The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].
5
Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[TCP/IP Settings].
[Use SNTP]
Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.
[NTP Server Name]
Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host
name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).
[Polling Interval]
Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.
6
Click [OK].
70
Setting Up
Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server
● You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration]
[Network
Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been
established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system
clock.
71
Setting Up
Installing Drivers
29UE-01E
Install the various drivers and associated software on your computer.
1
Make the necessary preparation before proceeding with the installation.
● If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the
computer.
● You can download drivers and software you are going to use from the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/).
● When new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website.
You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.
● Depending on your machine or environmental conditions, some functions may not be available.
● Some of the drivers are not supported depending on the OS. For more information about the supported
status of the latest OS, see the Canon website.
2
Proceed with the installation.
● For more information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are
going to use.
● Installation of drivers is impossible if receiving of the IP address are not permitted in [IP Address Filter]. For
more information, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 152) .
● If receiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by [IP Address
Filter], it is no longer possible to perform printing from that computer.
72
Basic Operations
Basic Operations
Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 74
Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 76
Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 77
Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 79
Multi-Purpose Tray ......................................................................................................................................... 80
Drawer ............................................................................................................................................................ 81
Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 82
Turning ON the Machine ..................................................................................................................................... 84
Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 85
Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................. 86
Basic Screens .................................................................................................................................................. 87
Home Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 88
<Status Monitor> Screen .......................................................................................................................... 89
Message Display ...................................................................................................................................... 91
Basic Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 92
Entering Text .................................................................................................................................................. 94
Loading Paper ...................................................................................................................................................... 95
Loading Paper in the Drawer .......................................................................................................................... 97
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ...................................................................................................... 100
Loading Envelopes ....................................................................................................................................... 102
Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................ 104
Specifying Paper Size and Type .................................................................................................................... 106
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer ....................................................................................... 107
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ..................................................................... 108
Registering a Custom Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 110
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ........................................................................................................ 111
Entering Quiet Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 112
Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 114
73
Basic Operations
Basic Operations
29UE-01F
This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are
frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.
◼ Parts and Their Functions
This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys
on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 76)
◼ Turning ON the Machine
This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF.
Turning ON the Machine(P. 84)
◼ Using the Operation Panel
This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes
how to enter characters and numbers. Using the Operation Panel(P. 86)
◼ Loading Paper
This section describes how to load the paper into the drawer.
74
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Basic Operations
◼ Entering Quiet Mode
This section describes how to place the machine in quiet mode to reduce operation sound.
Mode(P. 112)
◼ Entering Sleep Mode
This section describes how to set the sleep mode.
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 114)
75
Entering Quiet
Basic Operations
Parts and Their Functions
29UE-01H
This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front side and back side) and how they function. In addition
to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the toner
cartridges, etc., this section also describes the keys on the operation panel. Read this section for tips on how to use the
machine properly.
Front Side(P. 77)
Back Side(P. 79)
Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 80)
Drawer(P. 81)
Operation Panel(P. 82)
76
Basic Operations
Front Side
29UE-01J
Toner cover
Open the toner cover when replacing toner cartridge or drum cartridge.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 246)
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 249)
Output tray
Printed paper is output to the output tray.
Operation panel
The operation panel consists of keys such as [
] key, Back key, a display, and status indicators. You can
perform all the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.
Operation Panel(P. 82)
Basic Screens(P. 87)
Lift handles
Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine.
Relocating the Machine(P. 253)
Power switch
Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and
turn it back ON.
Front cover
Open this cover to load paper in the drawer.
Ventilation slots
Air from inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects
on the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.
77
Basic Operations
Paper stopper
Open the paper stopper when you want to prevent paper from falling out of the output tray.
Multi-purpose tray
Load the paper into the multi-purpose tray when you want to temporarily use a type of paper different from
that which is loaded in the drawer. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100)
Drawer
Load the paper to print in this tray.
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97)
78
Basic Operations
Back Side
29UE-01K
Back cover
Open the back cover when clearing paper jams.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 299)
Rating label
The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine.
Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 304)
When a
USB port
Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.
LAN port
Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc.
LAN(P. 25)
Power socket
Connect the power cord.
Anti-theft Security Slot
● This machine is provided with a security slot, to which you can attach
security wire or equivalent.
● The hole of the security slot is 4.2 mm wide and 8.1 mm high.
● For inquiries about the security slot, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer.
79
Connecting to a Wired
Basic Operations
Multi-Purpose Tray
29UE-01L
Multi-Purpose Tray
Lower the multi-purpose tray when loading paper.
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100)
80
Basic Operations
Drawer
29UE-01R
Paper guides
Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the
machine.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97)
81
Basic Operations
Operation Panel
29UE-01S
Display (screen)
You can view the operation and error statuses of this machine, the amount remaining in the toner cartridge,
etc. Basic Screens(P. 87)
[
] key
● When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen.
● When entering text, press to select the item you want to use.
● Press to decrease a setting value such as the contrast of the display.
[
] key
● When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately above the currently selected item.
● When changing setting values, press to increase a value.
[
] key
● When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen.
● When entering text, press to select the item you want to use.
● Press to increase a setting value such as the contrast of the display.
[
] key
● When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately below the currently selected item.
● When changing setting values, press to decrease a value.
Alarm indicator
Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.
82
Basic Operations
Job indicator
Blinks while operations such as printing are being performed. Lights up when there are documents waiting
to be processed.
[
] key
Press to apply settings or specified details.
Back key
Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the
settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.
LINKS
Basic Operation(P. 92)
83
Basic Operations
Turning ON the Machine
29UE-01U
This section describes how to turn ON the machine.
1
Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into a power outlet.
2
Press the power switch.
➠ The power indicator lights and the machine is ready for printing.
● A blank sheet of paper may be output when you turn ON the power for the first time after purchasing the
machine. This is not a malfunction.
LINKS
Turning OFF the Machine(P. 85)
84
Basic Operations
Turning OFF the Machine
29UE-01W
This section describes how to turn OFF the machine.
1
Press the power switch.
● Make sure that the power indicator has gone out.
● It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the
display turns off.
● To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.
● Even when the power is turned OFF, the machine continues to consume a small amount of power. To reduce
power consumption to zero, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.
85
Basic Operations
Using the Operation Panel
29UE-01X
You can use the display and keys of the operation panel to configure machine settings or operate functions. This
section describes basic usage of the display and keys.
Basic Screens(P. 87)
Basic Operation(P. 92)
Entering Text(P. 94)
● If you want to invert the light and dark parts of the display:
● If you want to adjust the contrast of the display:
<Invert Screen Colors>(P. 207)
<Contrast>(P. 207)
LINKS
Operation Panel(P. 82)
86
Basic Operations
Basic Screens
29UE-01Y
The Home screen or settings screen appears on the display. You can also use the display to check information such as
error messages and the machine's operation status.
Home Screen(P. 88)
<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 89)
Message Display(P. 91)
87
Basic Operations
Home Screen
29UE-020
The Home screen is displayed when the power is turned ON. Use this screen to specify settings for and register
functions.
Status indication
Displays the current status or messages.
<Status Monitor>
Select to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or to
view the network settings such as the IP address of the machine.
You can also check the status of the machine, such as the amount
remaining in the toner cartridge, etc. or whether any errors
occurred. <Status Monitor> Screen(P. 89)
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other machine
settings start from this button. Setting Menu List(P. 195)
Wi- Fi icon
Displayed when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
Amount remaining in the toner cartridge
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge in stages.
88
Basic Operations
<Status Monitor> Screen
29UE-021
When you select <Status Monitor>, a screen appears in which you can check the progress of document processing as
well as the status of the machine (the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridge, etc.) and network settings
such as the machine's IP address.
<Error Information/Notification>
Displays the details of any errors that occurred.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 287)
<Device Information>
Displays the status of the machine, such as the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, etc.
<Cartridge Level>
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge. Other internal parts may
reach the end of their lifetime before the amount remaining in the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge
reaches its lifetime.
<Check Counter>
Displays the total for printouts.
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 255)
<Version Information>
Displays firmware version information.
<Serial Number>
Displays the serial number.
<Print Job>
Displays the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.
Log(P. 121)
Checking the Printing Status and
<Network Information>
Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of
wireless LAN communications. Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
89
Basic Operations
90
Basic Operations
Message Display
29UE-022
Messages are displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner
cartridge lifetime is reached. Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 287)
When an Error Occurs
In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the onscreen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an
example.
91
Basic Operations
Basic Operation
29UE-023
Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.
Using
/
Scrolling the Screen
The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information fits on one screen. If
/
to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are
the scroll bar is displayed, use
inverted when it is selected.
Changing Setting Values
Use
/
to enter values.
● Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.
● You can also use
Using
/
to select the item you want to use when entering text.
Entering Text(P. 94)
/
Proceeding to the Next Screen/Returning to the Previous Screen
Press
to proceed to the next screen. Press
to return to the previous screen.
● You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing
the Back key.
92
, and return to the previous screen by pressing
Basic Operations
Changing Setting Values
Use
/
to adjust the slider scale.
Moving the Cursor
Use
/
to enter values.
● When entering text, use <
>/<
> on the display to move the cursor.
Entering Text(P. 94)
Using
Press
to apply a setting.
● You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the scrolling speed or the display language:
<Display Settings>(P. 207)
93
Basic Operations
Entering Text
29UE-024
Use the keys shown on the display to enter text and values. Select a character or number you want, and press
.
Selecting the Type of Text
Select <Switch Entry Mode> and press
Select the type of text and press
to display the screen for selecting the type of text that is entered.
.
Deleting Text
Select <
> on the screen, and press
● When <
> and <
to delete the character you entered.
> do not appear on the screen, you can select <
> on the screen and press
to delete all of the characters you entered.
Entering a Space
Select <Space> and press
to enter a space.
● When the cursor is located at the last character, selecting <
> and pressing
entered.
Moving the Cursor
Select <
> or <
> on the screen, and press
to move the cursor.
94
allows a space to be
Basic Operations
Loading Paper
29UE-025
You can load the paper into the drawer. See
Available Paper(P. 318) for available paper sizes and types.
About Paper
Precautions for Paper(P. 95)
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 96)
How to Load Paper
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100)
Loading Envelopes(P. 102)
Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 104)
Configuring the Settings for the Loaded Paper
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 106)
Precautions for Paper
Do not use the following types of paper:
● A paper jam or printing error may occur.
- Wrinkled or creased paper
- Curled or rolled paper
- Torn paper
- Damp paper
- Very thin paper
- Thin coarse paper
- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer
- Highly textured paper
- Glossy paper
Notes on use of paper
● Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper
that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in
poor print quality.
95
Basic Operations
Paper handling and storage
● It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused
should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a flat surface.
● Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.
● Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.
● Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.
● Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes
in temperature or humidity.
When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture
● Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.
There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from fixing
toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room
temperatures).
Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine
When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, take the following precautions.
◼ How to Store the Printed Paper
● Store on a flat surface.
● Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting
in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.
● Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.
● To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.
● When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have
undergone a change of color.
● Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.
◼ Precautions When Applying Adhesive
● Always use insoluble adhesive.
● Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.
● When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.
LINKS
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 110)
96
Basic Operations
Loading Paper in the Drawer
29UE-026
Load the paper that you usually use in the drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the drawer,
load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100)
When loading A5 size paper
● When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation. When loading paper in landscape
orientation, you must configure this setting in the printer driver. For more information, refer to the printer
driver Help.
Landscape orientation
1
Open the front cover.
2
Spread the paper guides apart.
Portrait orientation
● Slide the paper guides outward.
97
Basic Operations
3
Load the paper and slide it all the way in, until it touches the back side.
● Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine) and the print side face up.
Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.
● Before loading it, fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a flat surface to align the edges.
● When you insert the paper with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a confirmation screen is
displayed. <Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 208)
Keep the paper stack within the load limit guides
Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guides (
cause paper jams.
When loading envelopes or preprinted paper, see
Paper(P. 104) .
4
). Loading too much paper may
Loading Envelopes(P. 102) or
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
● Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the paper
Paper guides that are too loose or too tight may cause misfeeds or paper jams.
5
Close the front cover.
98
Loading Preprinted
Basic Operations
● When performing printing, open the paper stopper in advance so that the output paper does not fall out of
the output tray.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 107)
When changing the paper size or type
● The factory default settings for paper size and type are <A4> and <Plain>, respectively. If you load a
different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change
the settings, the machine cannot print properly.
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
drawer or multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100) ), with the side to print
face up (previously printed side face down).
- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 318)
99
Basic Operations
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray
29UE-027
1660-030
When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Load the
paper that you usually use in the drawer. Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97)
Load only one sheet of paper at a time
● Only one sheet of paper can be loaded each time you print.
When loading A5 size paper
● When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation. When loading paper in landscape
orientation, you must configure this setting in the printer driver. For more information, refer to the printer
driver Help.
Landscape orientation
1
Open the front cover.
2
Lower the multi-purpose tray.
3
Spread the paper guides apart.
Portrait orientation
● Slide the paper guides outward.
100
Basic Operations
4
Insert the paper slowly into the multi-purpose tray until it reaches the back of the
tray.
● Load the paper with the print side face up.
● When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see
Paper(P. 104) .
5
Loading Envelopes(P. 102) or
Loading Preprinted
Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.
Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper
● Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.
»
Continue to
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 108)
Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)
● You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the
drawer ( Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97) ) or multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face up
(previously printed side face down).
- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.
- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.
- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.
LINKS
Available Paper(P. 318)
101
Basic Operations
Loading Envelopes
29UE-028
Make sure to flatten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes
and which side is face up.
Before Loading Envelopes(P. 102)
Loading Envelopes in the Drawer(P. 103)
Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 103)
● This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you
need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading
envelopes in the drawer, see Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97) or Loading Paper in the MultiPurpose Tray(P. 100) .
Before Loading Envelopes
Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.
1
2
3
Close the flap of each envelope.
Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed
tightly.
Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and flatten any curls.
102
Basic Operations
4
Align the edges of the envelopes on a flat surface.
Loading Envelopes in the Drawer
Load the envelopes Monarch, No. 10 (COM10), DL, or C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the
machine), with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
● Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray
Load the envelopes Monarch, No. 10 (COM10), DL, or C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the
machine), with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.
● Load the envelopes so that the edge with the flap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.
103
Basic Operations
Loading Preprinted Paper
29UE-029
When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.
Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.
Making Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 104)
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 104)
● This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a
description of the general procedure for loading paper in the drawer, see
Loading Paper in the
Drawer(P. 97) or Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100) .
Making Printouts on Paper with Logos
Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos
Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the first page of the document) face down.
104
Basic Operations
Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation
Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation
The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting
● When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time
you perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Print
Side Priority>, the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face
down) can also be used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform
both 1-sided and 2-sided printing. <Switch Paper Feed Method> (P. 215)
105
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type
29UE-02A
Set the paper size and paper type when printing from an application with which you cannot set the paper size and
paper type. Make sure to change the paper settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously
loaded paper.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 107)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 108)
Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 110)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 111)
● If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.
106
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer
29UE-02C
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Paper Settings for Mobile Print>
3
Select the paper size.
Home Screen(P. 88)
<Size/Type Settings>.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.
When loading custom size paper
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
<Y>
3
4
enter the length of the <X> side using
enter the length of the <Y> side
Select <Apply>.
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97)
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 111)
Available Paper(P. 318)
107
/
Basic Operations
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose
Tray
29UE-02E
The screen shown here is displayed when paper is loaded in the multi-purpose tray. Follow the on-screen instructions
to specify settings that match the size and type of the loaded paper.
1
Select <Check>.
2
Select <Size/Type Settings>.
● If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select the <Other Sizes>.
When loading custom size paper
1
Select <Custom>.
2
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
<Y>
3
3
enter the length of the <X> side using
enter the length of the <Y> side
Select <Apply>.
Select the paper type.
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100)
108
/
Basic Operations
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 111)
Available Paper(P. 318)
109
Basic Operations
Registering a Custom Paper Size
29UE-02F
You can register one frequently used custom paper size.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Paper Settings for Mobile Print>
3
Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.
● Execute the following steps in sequence: <X>
<Y>
Home Screen(P. 88)
Select <Apply>.
5
Select the paper type.
<Custom>.
enter the length of the <X> side using
enter the length of the <Y> side
4
<Size/Type Settings>
LINKS
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97)
Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100)
110
/
Basic Operations
Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed
29UE-02H
You can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Paper Settings for Mobile Print>
3
Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.
Home Screen(P. 88)
<Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.
● Ensure that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.
● Paper sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting
selection screen.
4
Select <Apply>.
LINKS
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 107)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 108)
111
Basic Operations
Entering Quiet Mode
29UE-02J
The quiet mode function reduces the operation sound of the machine. You can also specify a time for the machine to
automatically enter quiet mode.
When quiet mode is enabled
● The operation of functions becomes slower.
When the machine cannot enter quiet mode
● The machine is in Special Printing Mode
● A particular paper size or paper type is specified
Entering Quiet Mode
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Special Processing>
<Enable Quiet Mode>
<On>
Specifying a time for the machine to enter quiet mode
You can specify a time for the machine to enter or exit quiet mode automatically. For example, this is useful
when wanting to reduce operation noise only for late-night operation.
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>
<Quiet Mode Time>
Specify each setting
<Start Time>
Specify a time for entering quiet mode. To set, select <On> then specify the time.
<End Time>
Specify a time for exiting quiet mode. To set, select <On> then specify the time.
112
<Apply>
Basic Operations
Exiting Quiet Mode
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
113
<Special Processing>
<Enable Quiet Mode>
<Off>
Basic Operations
Entering Sleep Mode
29UE-02K
The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power flow to the
operation panel. If no operations is performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, the machine
enters sleep mode automatically.
When in sleep mode
● When the machine enters sleep mode, the display turns off.
Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode
● When the machine is in operation
● When the Job indicator is lit up or blinking
● When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning
● When a paper jam occurs
● When the menu screen is displayed
● When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes
enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)
● When the machine is waiting for a wireless LAN connection or Direct Connection
Changing the Auto Sleep Time Value
Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a
specified length of time. We recommend using the factory default settings ( <Timer Settings>(P. 211) ) to
reduce power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters the auto
sleep mode, perform the procedure below.
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>
<Auto Sleep Time>
Set the amount of time that elapses before the
machine automatically enters sleep mode
Exiting Sleep Mode
You can press any key other than the power switch to exit the sleep mode.
114
Printing
Printing
Printing ................................................................................................................................................................ 116
Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 117
Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 119
Checking the Printing Status and Log ........................................................................................................... 121
115
Printing
Printing
29UE-02L
You can print documents on your computer by using the printer driver.
◼ Printing from a Computer
You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.
Printing from a Computer(P. 117)
Printing from Mobile Devices
● Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to
print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 124)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
Printing silently
If you mind the printing noise, you can reduce the noise by specifying the quiet mode. Note that If you print in
the quiet mode, printing becomes slower.
116
Printing
Printing from a Computer
29UE-02R
You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful
settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing, that enable you to print your documents in various ways.
Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as installing the printer driver on your
computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.
About the Printer Driver Help(P. 117)
Basic Printing Operations(P. 117)
About the Printer Driver Help
Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed
descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.
Basic Printing Operations
This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.
Paper settings on the machine
● Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in the drawer before
proceeding to printing.
1
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
2
Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].
3
Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].
● Switch the tab according to the settings.
117
Printing
4
Click [Print] or [OK].
➠ Printing starts.
● If you want to cancel printing, see
Canceling Prints(P. 119) .
LINKS
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 121)
118
Printing
Canceling Prints
29UE-02S
You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.
From a Computer(P. 119)
From the Operation Panel(P. 120)
From a Computer
You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.
1
Double-click the printer icon.
When the printer icon is not displayed
● Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 334) ), right-click the printer driver icon for
this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).
2
Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document]
3
Click [Yes].
[Cancel].
➠ Printing of the selected document is canceled.
● Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
Canceling from the Remote UI
● You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI:
Documents(P. 182)
Checking Current Status of Print
Canceling from an application
● On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].
119
Printing
From the Operation Panel
Cancel printing using <Status Monitor>.
◼ Check the Print Job Status Before Canceling
<Status Monitor>
<Print Job>
<Job Status>
● Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 117)
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 121)
120
Select the document
<Cancel>
<Yes>
Printing
Checking the Printing Status and Log
29UE-02U
You can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.
● When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs.
<Display Job Log>(P. 235)
Useful in the Following Cases
● When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the
documents waiting to be printed.
● When you cannot find your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an
error has occurred.
1
Select <Status Monitor>.
2
Select <Print Job>.
3
Check the print statuses and logs.
To check the print statuses
1
<Job Status>
Select the document whose status you want to check.
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
To check the print logs
1
<Job Log>
Select the document whose log you want to check.
● <OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a
document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.
➠ Displays detailed information about the document.
● The displayed document name or user name may not reflect the actual document or user name.
121
Printing
When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>
● This number represents an error code.
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 298)
LINKS
Basic Printing Operations(P. 117)
Canceling Prints(P. 119)
122
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices .................................................................................................................... 124
Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 125
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) .............................................................................. 126
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ...................................................................................................... 127
Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 129
Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 130
Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 134
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 137
Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 138
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control .............................................................................................. 140
123
Linking with Mobile Devices
Linking with Mobile Devices
29UE-02W
Linking the machine with mobile devices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate
application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile
devices via remote control to confirm printing status and change the settings of the machine.
Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 125)
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 127)
Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 129)
Using AirPrint(P. 130)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 140)
● Depending on your mobile device, the machine may not operate correctly.
124
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting with Mobile Devices
29UE-02X
There are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and
communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the
communication environment and the device you are using.
◼ Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router
Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router.
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 126)
◼ Connecting Directly
Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately
connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment. Connecting Directly (Access Point
Mode)(P. 127)
125
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)
29UE-02Y
If a wireless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication
with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to
connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN. Setting Up the Network
Environment(P. 22)
● If your mobile devices do not support IPv6, use the IPv4 address.
1
Select <Status Monitor> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Information>.
3
Display the IP address of the machine.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39)
Home Screen(P. 88)
IPv4
● Select <IPv4>
<IP Address>.
IPv6
● Select <IPv6>
4
<Link-Local Address>
<IP Address>.
Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.
126
Linking with Mobile Devices
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
29UE-030
Even in an environment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile
device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without difficult
settings.
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 127)
Connecting Directly(P. 127)
Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)
Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order (only for IPv4 environment).
Preparing the mobile device
● Configure settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.
Put the machine into the connection standby status.
● <Menu> <Network Settings>
Connection> to <On>.
<Direct Connection Settings>
set <Use Direct
Specifying the value for time until auto termination
● You can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled.
<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>(P. 199)
Connecting multiple mobile devices at the same time
● Configure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily. The network key can be left blank.
Point Mode Settings>(P. 199)
Connecting Directly
● It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.
127
<Access
Linking with Mobile Devices
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● When any mobile device is already connected, press
2
, and proceed to step 3.
Select <Direct Connection>.
● If a message appears, continue by following the instructions on the screen.
3
Select <Display SSID/Network Key>.
4
Configure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key
5
information that appear on the display.
When the target operation is completed, press
, then select <Disconnect>
<Yes>.
● Select <Connection Information> on the screen under the direct connection to check the connected mobile
device.
● While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the
mobile device you are using.
● If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and
network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.
● If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during
communication by direct connection, the communication may end.
● Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.
● If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN
when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection
process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the
machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication
may end.
● When you finish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the
mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.
● If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may
prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.
128
Linking with Mobile Devices
Utilizing the Machine through Applications
29UE-031
Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various
applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the
application, and the situation.
◼ Using Canon PRINT Business
This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When
printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating
systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (http://
www.canon.com/gomp/).
● You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.
◼ Printing with Canon Print Service
You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on
supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
◼ Printing by Mopria®
The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android
using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using
printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a
place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For
more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.
◼ Printing with Google Cloud Print
You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device
without using a printer driver. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
129
Linking with Mobile Devices
Using AirPrint
29UE-032
This section describes the settings required to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices.
AirPrint Settings
Configuring AirPrint Settings(P. 130)
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 132)
Functions of the AirPrint
Printing with AirPrint(P. 134)
Troubleshooting
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 137)
Configuring AirPrint Settings
You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying
the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
2
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 179)
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
● If you are using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Specify the required settings.
[AirPrint Settings].
130
Linking with Mobile Devices
[Use AirPrint]
Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.
[Printer Name]
Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] (
Configuring DNS(P. 62) ), the registered name is displayed.
[Location]
Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information] ([System
Management] in [System Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.
[Latitude]
Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.
[Longitude]
Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.
6
Click [OK].
If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings are set to <On>.
● Use HTTP
● IPP Print Settings
● Use mDNS (IPv4 Settings)
● Use mDNS (IPv6 Settings)
● If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specified, you may be unable to print any more from the
Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because [mDNS Name] (
Configuring DNS(P. 62) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac
again.
● Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.
131
Linking with Mobile Devices
◼ Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint
If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, configure the
necessary setting using the Remote UI.
Changing Print Settings
To perform printing with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.
Turning the Function On/Off
You can specify whether to perform printing with AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].
Log in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
[Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings]
Clear or select the [Use IPP Printing] check box [OK]
Changing the TLS Setting
You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing with AirPrint. The factory
default setting is [On].
Log in to the Remote UI in System Manager Mode ( Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
[Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings]
Clear or select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]
Displaying the Screen for AirPrint
You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view
information about consumables, such as toner cartridges, etc. Further, you can configure security function settings.
1
Select [System Preferences]
[Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac
you are using.
● If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
2
Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].
3
Click [Options & Supplies].
4
Click [Show Printer Webpage].
132
Linking with Mobile Devices
5
Log in to the Remote UI.
● To change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.
◼ AirPrint-Dedicated Page
When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below.
[AirPrint Settings]
Enables you to check the values entered in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the
machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.
[Other Settings]
[Print Security Settings]
Configure the print security settings using TLS or authentication.
[TLS Settings]
Enables you to change the key and certificate used for TLS.
TLS(P. 160)
Configuring the Key and Certificate for
[Key and Certificate Settings]
Enables you to generate and install a key and certificate, or request a certificate to be issued.
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160)
[Consumables Information]
Enables you to check the information of consumables of the machine and the device version.
Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
133
Linking with Mobile Devices
Printing with AirPrint
29UE-033
You can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 134)
Printing from a Mac(P. 135)
System Requirements
One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.
● iPad (all models)
● iPhone (3GS or later)
● iPod touch (3rd generation or later)
● Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*
*OS
X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection
Network Environment
One of the following environments is required.
● An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN
● An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly
● An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB
● For printing, it is required to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On].
with AirPrint(P. 132)
Changing the Setting of Functions Available
Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.
● For how to make sure of this, see
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 22) .
● For information on the Direct Connection, see
2
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 127) .
From the application on your Apple device, tap
134
to display the menu options.
Linking with Mobile Devices
3
Tap [Print].
4
Select this machine from [Printer].
● The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.
● The screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support
AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6
Tap [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
Checking the print status
● During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice
tap [Print].
Printing from a Mac
1
Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.
● For how to make sure of this, see
2
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 22) .
Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences]
[Printers & Scanners].
● If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.
3
Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.
● How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction
manual or Help for the application you are using.
4
Select the machine in the print dialog box.
● The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.
5
Specify the print settings as necessary.
135
Linking with Mobile Devices
● The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.
6
Click [Print].
➠ Printing starts.
136
Linking with Mobile Devices
If AirPrint Cannot Be Used
29UE-034
If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.
● Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, first turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10
seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.
● Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.
● Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may
take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.
● Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.
● For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sufficient amount
remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 132)
137
Linking with Mobile Devices
Using Google Cloud Print
29UE-035
Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or
computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional
printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.
Checking the Settings of the Machine(P. 138)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
● An environment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and
when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding
internet connection.
● Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.
● A Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on
the Google website.
Checking the Settings of the Machine
Check the following before configuring cloud printing.
● Make sure that the IPv4 address or IPv6 address is specified for the machine, and that the machine is able to
communicate with computers on a network.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 25)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
● Check whether the date and time of the machine are specified correctly.
Setting the Date/Time (P. 20)
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print
Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print from anywhere using the service.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
138
Linking with Mobile Devices
1
Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].
5
Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box
6
Click [Register] in [Registration Status].
Starting Remote UI(P. 179)
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[Google Cloud Print Settings].
[OK].
Re-Registering the Machine
● To re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again.
7
Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].
8
Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.
➠ Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google
Chrome™.
● For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud
Print home page.
Configuring Settings on the Operation Panel
● You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Print Settings>(P. 237)
<Google Cloud
Registering from a Mobile Device or Google Chrome
● You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the
confirmation screen before completion of the registration. Select <Yes> to complete the registration.
● For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.
139
Linking with Mobile Devices
Managing the Machine by the Remote Control
29UE-036
You can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can confirm the machine status or
perform various settings from a mobile device.
Supported Web Browsers
Web browsers supporting the Remote UI for mobile devices are the following.
Android OS
● Chrome
iOS
● Safari
Starting the Remote UI from Mobile Devices
Enter the IP address of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, confirm the IP
address set for the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 45) ). If it is unknown, ask your network administrator.
1
Start the Web browser of the mobile device.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address entry column.
● If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets.
Example: http://[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/
● For a "Smartphone Version" of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to
confirm all of the items, see the "PC Version."
LINKS
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 178)
140
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 142
Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................. 144
Setting the System Manager PIN .................................................................................................................. 145
Setting a Remote UI PIN ............................................................................................................................... 147
Configuring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 149
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 151
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings ......................................................................................... 152
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings ..................................................................................... 155
Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 157
Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 158
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS .................................................................................................. 160
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication .......................................................... 162
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 165
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication .......................................................... 168
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ......................................................................................... 170
Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 174
Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 175
Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 176
Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 177
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 178
Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 179
Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 182
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ................................................................................................... 187
Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 190
Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 192
141
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine
29UE-037
To reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or
unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should
manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.
◼ Configuring the Basic Management System
Setting Access Privileges(P. 144)
Configuring the Network Security Settings(P. 149)
◼ Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse
Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 174)
◼ Ensuring Effective Management
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 178)
142
Managing the Machine
◼ Managing the System Configuration and Settings
Updating the Firmware(P. 190)
Initializing Settings(P. 192)
143
Managing the Machine
Setting Access Privileges
29UE-038
Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine. When
privileges are set, the user must enter a PIN to change settings or access the Remote UI.
Access privileges are divided into two types: System Manager Mode and General User Mode. System Manager Mode
has full access privileges, and a System Manager PIN can be set to restrict logon in this mode. And by setting a Remote
UI Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI in General User Mode and in System Manager Mode without a
System Manager PIN set.
System Manager PIN
System Manager PIN is intended exclusively for Administrators having full access privileges. If you specify this
PIN, you need to log on to the machine using this PIN in order to access <Network Settings> or <System
Management Settings>. Set the System Manager PIN when you need different access privilege levels for
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
administrators and general users.
Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)
This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI.
Remote UI PIN(P. 147)
144
Setting a
Managing the Machine
Setting the System Manager PIN
29UE-039
Set a System Manager PIN that is intended exclusively for Administrators. You can access <Network Settings>, <System
Management Settings>, etc. only when the PIN has been entered correctly. It is recommended that only
Administrators know the PIN.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <System Management Settings>.
3
Select <System Manager Information Settings>
4
Press
5
Specify the System Manager PIN.
Home Screen(P. 88)
<System Manager PIN>.
.
● Enter a number of up to seven digits, and press
.
● When <PIN (Confirm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to confirm.
● You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."
● To disable the PIN, select <
press
> and press
to leave the text box blank, and then select <Apply> and
.
Setting the System Manager Name
1
Select <System Manager Name>.
2
Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 94) .
● Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help
line.
145
Managing the Machine
Configuring settings via the Remote UI
● Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration]
Management] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.
[System
● By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information,
Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can
register by using the operation panel. The registered information can be viewed on the [Device Information]
page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager Information(P. 184)
If a System Manager PIN is Set
● If you try to access <Network Settings> or <System Management Settings>, the
following screen is displayed. Enter the set PIN.
● Entering a PIN is also required when logging on in System Manager Mode in
the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 179)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 144)
146
Managing the Machine
Setting a Remote UI PIN
29UE-03A
You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Security Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[Remote UI Settings].
[Use Remote UI Access PIN]
If you select the check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.
[Set/Change PIN]
To set or change a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Confirm] text
boxes.
6
Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
● Remote UI Access PIN settings can also be accessed from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Settings>(P. 235)
147
<Remote UI
Managing the Machine
If <System Management Settings> are initialized
● The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN.
Menu>(P. 238)
LINKS
Setting Access Privileges(P. 144)
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
148
<Initialize
Managing the Machine
Configuring the Network Security Settings
29UE-03C
Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sniffing, spoofing,
and tampering of data as it flows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these
attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.
Firewall Settings
Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting
communication only to devices that have a specific IP address or MAC address. Restricting Communication
by Using Firewalls(P. 151)
Changing Port Numbers
A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are
predetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication
devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.
Changing Port Numbers(P. 157)
Proxy Settings
When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy
server. When the proxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be
expected to be enhanced. Setting a Proxy(P. 158)
TLS Encrypted Communication
TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web
browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine
from a computer via the Remote UI. Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160)
149
Managing the Machine
IEEE 802.1X Authentication
IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively
managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must
go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.
Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication
to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)
blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client
device. Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 170)
150
Managing the Machine
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls
29UE-03E
Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are
connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet filter, a feature that
restricts communication to devices with specified IP addresses or MAC address.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 152)
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 155)
151
Managing the Machine
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings
29UE-03F
You can either limit communication to only devices with specified IP addresses, or block devices with specified IP
addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Security Settings]
4
Click [Edit] to specify a filter type.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[IP Address Filter].
[IPv4 Address: Inbound Filter]
Restrict data received by the machine from a computer by specifying an IPv4 address.
[IPv6 Address: Inbound Filter]
Restrict data received by the machine from a computer by specifying an IPv6 address.
5
Specify the settings for packet filtering.
152
Managing the Machine
[Blocked Addresses]
Register addresses to be blocked, as well as check or delete registered blocked addresses.
[Allowed Addresses]
Register addresses to be allowed, as well as check or delete registered allowed addresses.
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box.
● Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
2
Specify the address.
● Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click
[Add].
Registered address
[Blocked Addresses]
Result
Restricts communication (received) with devices having their IP addresses entered
for [Address to Register]. Communication is allowed with devices with any other IP
addresses.
[Allowed Addresses]
Registered as both
Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses entered
for [Address to Register], and restricts communication with devices with any other IP
addresses.
Allows communication (received) only with devices having their IP addresses
registered in [Allowed Addresses], and restricts communication with devices with any
other IP addresses. However, communication is restricted for IP addresses also
registered in [Blocked Addresses].
Check for entry errors
● If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,
in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 233)
153
Managing the Machine
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 233)
Entry form for IP addresses
Description
IPv4:
Delimit numbers with periods.
Entering a single address
IPv6:
Delimit alphanumeric characters with
Example
192.168.0.10
fe80::10
colons.
Specifying a range of addresses
Specifying a range of addresses with a prefix
(IPv6 only)
Insert a hyphen between the
addresses.
Enter the address, followed by a slash
and a number indicating the prefix
length.
Deleting an IP address from exceptions
● Select an IP address and click [Delete].
3
192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20
Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable IP address filtering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 233)
<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 233)
154
fe80::1234/64
Managing the Machine
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings
29UE-03H
You can limit communication to only devices with specified MAC addresses.
This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Security Settings]
4
Click [Edit] .
5
Specify the settings for packet filtering.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[MAC Address Filter].
● Specify MAC addresses for exceptions.
1
Select the [Use Filter] check box.
● Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.
2
Specify address exceptions.
● Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].
155
Managing the Machine
● You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.
Check for entry errors
● If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the
Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. <MAC Address
Filter>(P. 233)
Deleting a MAC address from exceptions
● Select a MAC address and click [Delete].
3
Click [OK].
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable MAC address filtering from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Filter>(P. 233)
LINKS
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 152)
156
<MAC Address
Managing the Machine
Changing Port Numbers
29UE-03J
Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for
major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are
well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has
been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.
Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.
● To change the port number for proxy server, see
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Network Settings>.
Setting a Proxy(P. 158) .
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
3
Select <TCP/IP Settings>
4
Selecting the protocol of which you want to change the port number.
<Port Number Settings>.
Learning more about the protocols
● <LPD>/<RAW>/<WSD Multicast Discovery>
● <HTTP>
● <SNMP>
5
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 48)
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 176)
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 66)
Enter the port number, and select <Apply>.
● On how to enter text, see
Entering Text(P. 94) .
LINKS
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
157
Managing the Machine
Setting a Proxy
29UE-03K
A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other
devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The
client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the
resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of traffic between in-house and outside networks
but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use
Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make
sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and
password for authentication.
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 179)
Starting Remote
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].
5
Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[TCP/IP Settings].
[Use Proxy]
Select the check box to use the specified proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.
[HTTP Proxy Server Address]
Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.
[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]
Change the port number as necessary.
[Use Proxy within Same Domain]
158
Managing the Machine
Select the check box to also use the specified proxy server for communication with devices in the same
domain.
[Use Proxy Authentication]
To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the
user name in the [User Name] text box.
[Set/Change Password]
To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and
enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.
6
Click [OK].
LINKS
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
159
Managing the Machine
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS
29UE-03L
You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer
Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when
the Remote UI is used for specifying settings such as SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote
UI, you need to specify a "key and certificate" (server certificate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or
install the key and certificate for TLS before enabling TLS ( Management Functions(P. 323) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 179)
Starting Remote
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Key and Certificate] in [TLS Settings].
5
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[TCP/IP Settings].
Viewing details of a certificate
● You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text link
under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.
6
Enable TLS for the Remote UI.
1
Click [Security Settings]
2
Click [Edit].
3
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].
[Remote UI Settings].
160
Managing the Machine
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
TLS>(P. 233)
<Use
Starting the Remote UI with TLS
● If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the
security certificate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address field, and then proceed
to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 179)
LINKS
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 66)
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 162)
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 165)
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 168)
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 170)
161
Managing the Machine
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network
Communication
29UE-03R
A key and certificate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via
Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certificates
are used with the key and certificate generated in "Network Communication."
● If you want to use a server certificate that has a CA signature, you can generate a CSR together with a key
instead of a certificate. Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 165)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Security Settings]
4
Click [Generate Key].
Starting Remote
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
Deleting a registered key and certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate you want to delete
click [OK].
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is
displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key and certificate
before deleting it.
5
Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and certificate.
162
Managing the Machine
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the dropdown list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level
becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.
● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certificate Settings]
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity start date of the certificate, in the order of: year, month, day.
[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]
Enter the validity end date of the certificate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than
[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
7
Click [OK].
163
Managing the Machine
● Generating a key and certificate may take some time.
● After the key and certificate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160)
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 168)
164
Managing the Machine
Generating a Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
29UE-03S
Because certificates generated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result
depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certificate authority issue the certificate with the CA
signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certificate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from
Remote UI. When the certificate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.
Generating a Key and CSR(P. 165)
Registering a Certificate to a Key(P. 167)
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
Generating a Key and CSR
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Security Settings]
4
Click [Generate Key].
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
Deleting a registered key and certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate you want to delete
click [OK].
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is
displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and certificate before
deleting it.
5
Select [Key and Certificate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].
6
Specify settings for the key and CSR.
165
Managing the Machine
[Key Settings]
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to find later in a
list.
[Signature Algorithm]
Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.
[Key Algorithm]
Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the dropdown list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication.
However, the security is tighter.
● When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the
key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].
[Certificate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]
[Country/Region]
Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.
You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"
for the United States.
[State]/[City]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.
[Organization]/[Organization Unit]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.
[Common Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certificate as necessary. "Common Name"
is often abbreviated as "CN."
7
Click [OK].
● Generating a key and CSR may take some time.
8
Click [Store in File].
● A dialog box for storing the file appears. Choose where to store the file and click [Save].
166
Managing the Machine
➠ The CSR file is stored on the computer.
9
Attach the stored file and submit the application to the certification authority.
Registering a Certificate to a Key
The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certificate issued from the certificate authority based on the
CSR is registered in the key. Once the certification authority has issued the certificate, register it using the procedure
below.
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Security Settings]
4
Click [Key Name] or [Certificate] required to register the certificate.
5
Click [Register Certificate].
6
Click [Browse], specify the file for the certificate signing request, and click [Register].
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[Key and Certificate Settings].
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160)
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 162)
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 168)
167
Managing the Machine
Registering the Key and Certificate for Network
Communication
29UE-03U
You can obtain the key and certificate, and the CA certificate from a certification authority (CA) for use with the
machine. Install and register the obtained key and certificate file and CA certificate file in this machine using Remote
UI. Check the key and certificate, and CA certificate conditions that are required for the machine in advance (
Management Functions(P. 323) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
Starting Remote
UI(P. 179)
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Security Settings]
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[Key and Certificate Settings] or [CA Certificate Settings].
● Click [Key and Certificate Settings] to install a key and certificate, or [CA Certificate Settings] to install a CA
certificate.
4
Click [Register Key and Certificate] or [Register CA Certificate].
Deleting a registered key and certificate or CA certificate
● Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certificate or CA certificate you want to delete
cannot delete the preinstalled CA certificates.
click [OK]. You
● A key and certificate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is
displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and certificate before
deleting it.
Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certificates
● Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certificate you want to disable. To enable the certificate
again, click [Enable] on the right of the certificate.
5
Click [Install].
168
Managing the Machine
Deleting the key and certificate file or CA certificate file
● Click [Delete] on the right of the file you want to delete
6
click [OK].
Click [Browse], specify the file to install, and click [Start Installation].
➠ The key and certificate file or the CA certificate file is installed on the machine from a computer.
7
Register the key and certificate or CA certificate.
Registering a key and certificate
1
Click [Register] on the right of the key and certificate file you want to register.
2
Enter the name of the key and password.
[Key Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the key to be registered.
[Password]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the file to be registered.
3
Click [OK].
Registering a CA certificate
Click [Register] on the right of the CA certificate file you want to register.
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160)
Generating the Key and Certificate for Network Communication(P. 162)
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 170)
169
Managing the Machine
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings
29UE-03W
The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server
(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a
device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that
the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,
which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,
a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.
IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method
Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certificate or
a CA certificate before configuring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Registering the Key and Certificate for
Network Communication(P. 168) ).
TLS
The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certificates. A
key and certificate issued by a certification authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when
authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certificate installed via the Remote UI can be
used in addition to a CA certificate preinstalled in the machine.
TTLS
This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certificate
for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used
with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method (
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160) ).
PEAP
The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol.
Enable TLS for the Remote UI before configuring this authentication method ( Configuring the Key and
Certificate for TLS(P. 160) ).
● For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the
Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187) .
1
Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode.
UI(P. 179)
170
Starting Remote
Managing the Machine
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Select [Network Settings]
4
Click [Edit].
5
Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name]
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
[IEEE 802.1X Settings].
text box.
[Use IEEE 802.1X]
Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
[Login Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.
6
Configure the required settings according to the specified authentication method.
171
Managing the Machine
Setting TLS
1
Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certificate].
● You cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.
2
Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certificate you want to use for the client
authentication.
Viewing details of a certificate
● You can check the details of the certificate or verify the certificate by clicking the corresponding text
link under [Key Name], or the certificate icon.
Setting TTLS/PEAP
1
Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.
Internal protocol for TTLS
● You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP.
2
Click [Change User Name/Password].
● To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check
box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.
3
Set the user name/password.
[User Name]
Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.
[Change Password]
To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new
password both in the [Password] and [Confirm] text boxes.
4
Click [OK].
172
Managing the Machine
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
Using the operation panel
● You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from <Menu> in the Home screen.
Settings>(P. 205)
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160)
173
<IEEE 802.1X
Managing the Machine
Restricting the Machine's Functions
29UE-03X
Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,
the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.
Restricting USB Functions
The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as
an information leakage. You can restrict a USB connection with a computer. Restricting USB
Functions(P. 175)
Disabling HTTP Communication
When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection,
you can disable HTTP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port. Disabling HTTP
Communication(P. 176)
Disabling Remote Management
When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote
UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 177)
174
Managing the Machine
Restricting USB Functions
29UE-03Y
USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source
of information leakage if it is not properly managed. This section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port
of the machine.
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 175)
Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer
You can disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. If this port is disabled, the
machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB.
<Menu>
<System Management Settings>
175
<Use as USB Device>
<Off>
Restart the machine
Managing the Machine
Disabling HTTP Communication
29UE-040
HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you
are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party
intrusions via the unused HTTP port.
● Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing
with Google Cloud Print.
<Menu>
<Network Settings>
<TCP/IP Settings>
LINKS
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 48)
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
Changing Port Numbers(P. 157)
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 178)
176
<Use HTTP>
<Off>
<Yes>
Managing the Machine
Disabling Remote UI
29UE-041
The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specified by using a Web browser on a computer. To use
the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a
computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the
risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.
<Menu>
<System Management Settings>
<Remote UI Settings>
LINKS
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 176)
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 178)
177
<Use Remote UI>
<Off>
Managing the Machine
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
29UE-042
Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the
status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system
management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see System
Environment(P. 324) .
Functions of the Remote UI
Checking the Status and Logs(P. 182)
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187)
Basics of the Remote UI
Starting Remote UI(P. 179)
178
Managing the Machine
Starting Remote UI
29UE-043
To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.
Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 45) ). If you have any questions,
ask your Network Administrator.
1
Start the Web browser.
2
Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address field, and press the
[ENTER] key.
● If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://
[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).
If a security alert is displayed
● A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Configuring the
Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160) ). When certificate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue
browsing the Web site.
3
Log in to the Remote UI.
When a System Manager PIN is not set
Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode].
[System Manager Mode]
You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings.
[General User Mode]
You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When
you want to check if a specific document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document
of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is
automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login
name.
[Remote UI Access PIN]
If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN.
Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 147)
179
Managing the Machine
When a System Manager PIN is set
Enter the appropriate PIN in [System Manager PIN] to log in to System Manager Mode.
System Manager PIN(P. 145)
4
Setting the
Click [Log In].
➠ The Portal page (main page) will be displayed.
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
Remote UI Screen
When you log in to the Remote UI, the following Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on
the Portal page and the basic operations.
[Device Basic Information]
Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the
Error Information page will be displayed.
[Consumables Information]
Displays information about consumables.
[Support Link]
Displays the support link specified in [Device Information] under [System Management].
Refresh Icon
Refreshes the currently displayed page.
180
Managing the Machine
[Log Out]
Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.
[Mail to System Manager]
Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specified in [System Manager Information]
under [System Management].
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/
history or cancel the processing.
[Settings/Registration]
Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change
the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 187)
181
Managing the Machine
Checking the Status and Logs
29UE-044
Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 182)
Checking History of Documents(P. 183)
Checking Error Information(P. 183)
Checking Consumables(P. 183)
Checking Device Specifications(P. 184)
Checking System Manager Information(P. 184)
Checking Print Total Counter(P. 185)
Checking History of Cartridge(P. 185)
Checking Eco Information(P. 185)
● A file name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the
file name.
Checking Current Status of Print Documents
The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Job Status]
● You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].
● If you logged on in System Manager Mode, all the print documents currently printing and waiting to
be printed will be listed.
● If you entered your user name when you logged on in General User Mode, your user name will only
be displayed on the documents that you printed.
● Click [Job Number] on the paused documents to display detailed information. You can check the user
name and the page count of the printed document.
182
Managing the Machine
Checking History of Documents
The history of print is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Job Log]
Checking Error Information
When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the
Portal page (main page). Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Error
Checking Consumables
Consumables information such as a cartridge model number is displayed. You can also click [Check Consumables
Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page ( Remote UI Screen(P. 180) ).
Log in to the Remote UI (
[Consumables]
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
183
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
Managing the Machine
Checking Device Specifications
The maximum print speed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Features]
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Device
Checking System Manager Information
Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is set in [System Management]
on the [Settings/Registration] page.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
184
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Device
Managing the Machine
Checking Print Total Counter
The total number of pages that have been printed is displayed.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Counter]
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Check
Checking History of Cartridge
You can check the usage logs of the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge. The display can be changed to either the
toner cartridge or the drum cartridge.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Log]
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Cartridge
Checking Eco Information
You can check information such as the number of printouts per month and amount of consumed power.
Log in to the Remote UI (
Information]
Starting Remote UI(P. 179) )
185
[Status Monitor/Cancel]
[Eco
Managing the Machine
LINKS
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
186
Managing the Machine
Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI
29UE-045
You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the
machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI. This section describes the basic flow of changing the
settings of the machine using the Remote UI.
● Some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.
● Some settings may require operations that differ from the procedure described here.
1
Start the Remote UI.
2
Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page.
3
Click the setting you want to configure in the menu on the left side of the screen.
4
Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.
5
Click [Edit].
Starting Remote UI(P. 179)
187
Remote UI Screen(P. 180)
Managing the Machine
6
Specify the required settings.
7
Click [OK].
8
Restart the machine as necessary.
● Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.
188
Managing the Machine
● For information about whether you need to restart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.
189
Managing the Machine
Updating the Firmware
29UE-046
For the firmware, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two
methods of update: the one is to access the latest firmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the
update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest firmware
version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed
in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a
wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.
Installation Condition of the Machine
How to Install the Update
Wireless LAN connection
Updating via the Internet(P. 190)
Wired LAN connection
Updating via the Internet(P. 190)
Updating from a Computer(P. 191)
USB connection
Updating from a Computer(P. 191)
● If you are in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform firmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection,
and perform the update from the computer.
Checking the firmware version
● You can check the firmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the
firmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly. Checking the Firmware
Version(P. 191)
Updating via the Internet
You can access the Canon server from the machine to update the firmware to the latest version.
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <System Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Select <Update Firmware>.
4
Select <Via Internet>.
➠ A check for existence of the latest firmware is performed.
190
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Managing the Machine
● If the <This is the latest firmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the firmware.
5
Check the message and select <Yes>.
6
When a license screen appears, press
7
Select <OK>.
.
➠ When the firmware update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.
● Do not turn OFF the machine while the restart is in progress.
Updating from a Computer
When you have downloaded the latest firmware version from the Canon website, use "User Support Tool" utility
software to update the firmware from a computer. For how to perform firmware update from a computer, see the
"User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the firmware.
To Put the Machine into a Firmware Update Waiting State
<Menu>
<System Management Settings>
<Update Firmware>
<Via PC>
<Yes>
Checking the Firmware Version
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <System Management Settings>.
Home Screen(P. 88)
● If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN.
3
Select <Update Firmware>.
4
Select <Version Information>.
➠ The current firmware version is displayed.
191
Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
Managing the Machine
Initializing Settings
29UE-047
You can restore the following settings:
Initializing Eco Report Counter(P. 192)
Initializing Menu(P. 192)
Initializing Key and Certificate(P. 192)
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 193)
Initializing Eco Report Counter
You can restore the Eco Report Counter settings to the factory defaults.
<Menu>
<System Management Settings>
<Initialize Eco Report Counter>
<Yes>
Initializing Menu
You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 195) ). Depending on the settings selected, you
may need to restart the machine after initialization.
<Menu>
initialize
<System Management Settings> <Initialize Menu>
<Yes> Restart the machine if necessary
Select the item you want to
● You can restore the settings only for <Network Settings>.
<Menu>
<Network Settings>
<Initialize Network Settings>
<Yes>
Restart the machine
Initializing Key and Certificate
You can restore the settings of the key and certificate and the CA certificate. Note that all the keys and certificates and
CA certificates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certificates) will be deleted after
initializing.
192
Managing the Machine
● After initializing, functions that require a key and certificate such as TLS encrypted communication are not
available. To use these functions, configure the settings for the key and certificate and activate the functions
again.
Log in to the Remote UI with Administrator privileges ( Starting Remote UI(P. 179) ) [Settings/
Registration] [Initialize Setting Information] [Initialize Key and Certificate] [Initialize] [OK]
Initializing All Data/Settings
This enables restoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents
sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process finishes,
the machine automatically restarts.
● Before initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.
These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.
● To use the machine after initializing it, you need to configure all settings from the beginning.
<Menu>
<System Management Settings>
LINKS
Configuring the Key and Certificate for TLS(P. 160)
193
<Initialize All Data/Settings>
<Yes>
<Yes>
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 195
<Direct Connection> .......................................................................................................................................... 196
<Network Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 197
<Output Reports> .............................................................................................................................................. 206
<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 207
<Timer Settings> ............................................................................................................................................... 211
<Common Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 215
<Printer Settings> ............................................................................................................................................. 217
<Paper Settings for Mobile Print> .................................................................................................................... 227
<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 228
<System Management Settings> ...................................................................................................................... 232
194
Setting Menu List
Setting Menu List
29UE-048
You can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by configuring settings described in this
chapter. To start configuration, select <Menu> on the Home screen ( Home Screen(P. 88) ). This section describes
what each item in the setting menu can configure.
● You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings:
Settings(P. 256)
195
Printing Lists of
Setting Menu List
<Direct Connection>
29UE-049
Make a direct connection between a mobile device and the machine. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)
(P. 127)
Settings for Direct Connection can be specified from <Direct Connection Settings>(P. 198) .
196
Setting Menu List
<Network Settings>
29UE-04A
All the settings related to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>(P. 197)
<Wireless LAN Settings>(P. 197)
<Direct Connection Settings>(P. 198)
<Easy Connection via PC>(P. 199)
<TCP/IP Settings>(P. 200)
<SNMP Settings>(P. 203)
<Dedicated Port Settings>(P. 204)
<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>(P. 205)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 205)
<IEEE 802.1X Settings>(P. 205)
<Initialize Network Settings>(P. 205)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using or other
setting items.
<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>
When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when
switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using
the following <Wireless LAN Settings>). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 24)
<Wired LAN>
<Wireless LAN>
<Wireless LAN Settings>
Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the
setting for saving power consumption.
<SSID Settings>
Select to configure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by
inputting manually from the operation panel.
<Select Access Point>
Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.
You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting
a Wireless Router(P. 32)
<Enter Manually>
Select to configure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify
authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed
Settings(P. 34)
<Security Settings>
197
Setting Menu List
<None>
<WEP>
<Open System>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<Shared Key>
WEP Key 1 to 4
<WPA/WPA2-PSK>
<Auto>
<AES-CCMP>
<WPS Push Button Mode>
Select to automatically configure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router.
Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 28)
Setting
<WPS PIN Code Mode>
Select to configure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router.
Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 30)
Setting Up
<Power Save Mode>
Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings>
<OK> <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>
Read the displayed message
<Wireless LAN Information>
Select to view the current wireless LAN settings.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
<MAC Address>
<Wireless LAN Status>
<Latest Error Information>
<Channel>
<SSID Settings>
<Security Settings>
<Power Save Mode>
<Direct Connection Settings>
Set whether to connect directly. By enabling this function, connecting directly with the machine is possible even in an
environment without an access point or wireless LAN router. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 127)
<Use Direct Connection>
<Off>
<On>
198
Setting Menu List
<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>
Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established.
0 (Do not terminate session automatically)
1 to 10 to 60 (min.)
<Menu>
<Network Settings>
Termination>
<Direct Connection Settings>
<Time Until Direct Connection
Enter the time
<Access Point Mode Settings>
Configure the SSID/network key arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the
same time, you need to configure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.
<Use Custom SSID>
<Off>
<On>
<SSID>
<Use Custom Network Key>
<Off>
<On>
<Network Key>
<Menu> <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode
Settings> <Use Custom SSID>/<Use Custom Network Key> <On> Enter the SSID/network
key <Apply>
<IP Address Settings for Direct Conn.>
Specify an IP address for using Direct Connection.
<Menu> <Network Settings>
Conn.> Enter the IP address
<Direct Connection Settings>
<Apply>
<IP Address Settings for Direct
<Easy Connection via PC>
Start Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). This allows you to use Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility on
your PC to configure network settings.
199
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Network Settings>
<Easy Connection via PC>
Start connecting
● "Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility" is available on the Canon website (http://www.canon.com/).
<TCP/IP Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.
<IPv4 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.
<IP Address Settings>
Configure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP
network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39)
<Auto Acquire>
<Select Protocol>
<Off>
<DHCP>
<BOOTP>
<RARP>
<Auto IP>
<Off>
<On>
<Manually Acquire>
<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0
<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0
<Check Settings>
<Auto Acquire>*
<IP Address>
<Subnet Mask>
<Gateway Address>
<PING Command>
Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network.
Connection(P. 40)
Testing the Network
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Configuring DNS(P. 62)
<DNS Server Settings>
<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
200
Setting Menu List
<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dyn. Updt. Intrvl.>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<DHCP Option Settings>
If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the
host name and to use the dynamic update function. Configuring DNS(P. 62)
<Acquire Host Name>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update>
<Off>
<On>
<IPv6 Settings>
Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network.
<Use IPv6>
Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings.
Addresses(P. 42)
Setting IPv6
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Link-Local Address>
<Prefix Length>
<Stateless Address Settings>
Enable or disable stateless addresses.
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 42)
<Off>
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateless Address>
<Prefix Length>
<Use DHCPv6>
Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6.
<Off>
201
Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 42)
Setting Menu List
<On>
<Check Settings>
<Stateful Address>
<Prefix Length>
<DNS Settings>
Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.
Configuring DNS(P. 62)
<DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings>
<Use IPv4 Host/Domain>
<Off>
<Host Name>
<Domain Name>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Manual Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateful Address>
<Off>
<On>
<Register Stateless Address>
<Off>
<On>
<DNS Dynamic Update Interval>
0 to 24
to 48 (hr.)
<LPD Print Settings>
Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 48)
<Off>
<On>
<RAW Print Settings>
Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specific printing protocol.
Functions(P. 48)
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD
<Off>
<On>
<WSD Settings>
Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer by using the WSD protocol.
Configuring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 48)
<WSD Print Settings>
202
Setting Menu List
<Use WSD Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Use WSD Browsing>
<Off>
<On>
<Use Multicast Discovery>
<Off>
<On>
<Use HTTP>
Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote
UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 176)
<Off>
<On>
<Port Number Settings>
Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment.
<LPD>
1 to 515
Changing Port Numbers(P. 157)
to 65535
<RAW>
1 to 9100
to 65535
<WSD Multicast Discovery>
1 to 3702 to 65535
<HTTP>
1 to 80
<SNMP>
1 to 161
to 65535
to 65535
<MTU Size>
Select the maximum size of packets the machine receives.
Unit(P. 60)
Changing the Maximum Transmission
<1300>
<1400>
<1500>
<SNMP Settings>
Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.
Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 66)
203
Setting Menu List
<SNMPv1 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to
Management Information Base (MIB) objects.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Network Settings>
<SNMP Settings>
<SNMPv1 Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
<SNMPv3 Settings>
Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is
enabled.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Network Settings>
<SNMP Settings>
<SNMPv3 Settings>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from Host>
Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running
SNMP-compatible software.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Network Settings>
Host> Select <Off> or <On>
<SNMP Settings>
<Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from
<Dedicated Port Settings>
Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing from the computer and when browsing
or specifying the machine settings over the network.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Network Settings>
<Dedicated Port Settings>
204
Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>
Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment.
Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 61)
0
Setting a
to 300 (sec.)
<Ethernet Driver Settings>
Select the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX).
You can also view the MAC address of the machine.
<Auto Detect>
Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.
Configuring Ethernet Settings(P. 58)
<Off>
<Communication Mode>
<Half Duplex>
<Full Duplex>
<Ethernet Type>
<10BASE-T>
<100BASE-TX>
<On>
<MAC Address>
Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device.
the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 45)
<IEEE 802.1X Settings>
Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 170)
<Off>
<On>
<Initialize Network Settings>
Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults.
205
<Initialize Menu>(P. 238)
Viewing
Setting Menu List
<Output Reports>
29UE-04C
You can print out and check the settings of machine setting options and other details as reports or lists.
Reports and Lists(P. 256)
206
Printing
Setting Menu List
<Preferences>
29UE-04E
All the settings related to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger
( ).
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your
country or region.
<Display Settings>
<Contrast>
Adjust the contrast (the difference between the light and dark parts) of the display to suit the installation
location of the machine.
Five Levels
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Contrast>
Adjust the contrast
<Invert Screen Colors>
Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was
adjusted in <Contrast>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>
Select the unit of measurement.
<Millimeter>
<Inch>
207
<Invert Screen Colors>
Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Preferences>
<Millimeter> or <Inch>
<Display Settings>
<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch>
Select
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading paper into the
drawer.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
or <On>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Notify to Check Paper Settings>
Select <Off>
<Message Display Time>
Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.
1 to 2
to 5 (sec.)
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Message Display Time>
Enter a number for
the interval
<Scrolling Speed>
Adjust the scrolling speed of the screen by selecting from three levels.
<Slow>
<Standard>
<Fast>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Scrolling Speed>
<Language> *
Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.
<Arabic>
<Basque>
<Bulgarian>
<Catalan>
<Chinese (Simplified)>
208
Select the speed
Setting Menu List
<Chinese (Traditional)>
<Croatian>
<Czech>
<Danish>
<Dutch>
<English>
<Estonian>
<Finnish>
<French>
<German>
<Greek>
<Hungarian>
<Italian>
<Japanese>
<Korean>
<Latvian>
<Lithuanian>
<Norwegian>
<Polish>
<Portuguese>
<Romanian>
<Russian>
<Slovak>
<Slovene>
<Spanish>
<Swedish>
<Turkish>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
<Remote UI Language> *
Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.
<Chinese (Simplified)>
<Chinese (Traditional)>
<Czech>
<Danish>
<Dutch>
<English>
<Finnish>
<French>
<German>
<Hungarian>
<Italian>
<Japanese>
<Korean>
<Norwegian>
<Polish>
<Portuguese>
<Russian>
<Spanish>
209
<Language>
Select a language
Setting Menu List
<Swedish>
<Turkish>
<Menu>
<Preferences>
<Display Settings>
210
<Remote UI Language>
Select a language
Setting Menu List
<Timer Settings>
29UE-04F
All the settings related to the timer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Quiet Mode Time>(P. 211)
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 211)
<Auto Sleep Time>(P. 213)
<Auto Reset Time>(P. 213)
<Auto Shutdown Time>(P. 213)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your
country or region.
<Quiet Mode Time>
You can reduce the operation sound of the machine when you want it to run more quietly (quiet mode). Set a time for
the machine to enter quiet mode automatically. You can also set the machine to always run in quiet mode. Entering
Quiet Mode(P. 112)
<Start Time>
<Off>
<On>
Start time setting to enter quiet mode
<End Time>
<Off>
<On>
Stop time setting to exit quiet mode
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>
<Quiet Mode Time>
Specify each setting
<Apply>
<Date/Time Settings>
Specify date and time settings, including the date format and the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
<Date Format> *
Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).
<YYYY MM/DD>
<MM/DD/YYYY>
<DD/MM YYYY>
211
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>
<Date/Time Settings>
<Date Format>
Select the date format
<Time Format>
Select the display setting
<Time Format>
Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.
<12 Hour (AM/PM)>
<24 Hour>
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>
<Date/Time Settings>
<Current Date/Time Settings>
Set the current date and time.
Setting the Date/Time (P. 20)
● Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the
current date and time are also changed accordingly.
● The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.
<Time Zone> *
Select the time zone. If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also
changed accordingly. Setting the Date/Time (P. 20)
<(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC+00:00) Lisbon, London>
to <(UTC+14:00) Kiritimati
Island>
UTC
● Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks
and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.
<Daylight Saving Time Settings> *
Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to
which daylight saving time is in effect. Setting the Date/Time (P. 20)
212
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
Start: Month, Week, Day
End: Month, Week, Day
<Auto Sleep Time>
If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specified period of time, the machine enters
sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.
Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to
save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 114)
1
to 30 (min.)
<Auto Reset Time>
If a key is not pressed for a specified period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the
default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not
performed in the following cases:
● The setting menu is displayed.
● The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents.
● An error message is displayed and the Alarm indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the
error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)
0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)
1 to 2 to 9 (min.)
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>
<Auto Reset Time>
Specify the Auto Reset time
<Auto Shutdown Time> *
Set a timer to automatically shut down the machine after a specified period of idle time has elapsed since the
machine entered the sleep mode.
0 (Auto Shutdown is disabled.)
1 to 4 to 8 (hr.)
<Menu>
<Timer Settings>
<Auto Shutdown Time>
213
Set the Auto Shutdown time
Setting Menu List
● If any settings of the [Timer Settings] are changed from the Remote UI while the machine is in the sleep
mode, the timer for the <Auto Shutdown Time> setting is reset to the beginning. The machine automatically
shuts down after a specified period of idle time has elapsed since the timer was reset.
214
Setting Menu List
<Common Settings>
29UE-04H
All the settings related to the paper feed method are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger ( ).
<Switch Paper Feed Method>
Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. In general use, to print on paper with logos, you
need to change how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2sided printing. However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load the paper with the logo
side facing down for 1-sided printing in the same way as for 2-sided printing. Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 104) .
<Multi-Purpose Tray>
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Drawer 1>
<Speed Priority>
<Print Side Priority>
<Menu> <Common Settings> <Switch Paper Feed Method>
<Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>
Select the paper source
Select
Paper Sources
Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.
<Speed Priority>
When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you
perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.
We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.
<Print Side Priority>
To print on a specific side of paper, you do not need to flip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2sided printing is selected.
● If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided
printing ( Available Paper(P. 318) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case,
215
Setting Menu List
you need to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected (
Paper(P. 104) ).
● 1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.
216
Loading Preprinted
Setting Menu List
<Printer Settings>
29UE-04J
All the settings related to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).
<Action When Paper Size Mismatch>(P. 217)
<Image Quality Settings for Mobile Print>(P. 217)
<Copies>(P. 218)
<2-Sided Printing>(P. 218)
<Default Paper>(P. 218)
<Print Quality>(P. 219)
<Layout>(P. 220)
<Timeout>(P. 221)
<PCL>(P. 221)
Priority of settings
● If a print setting is specified both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the
specification from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specification from the
operation panel becomes effective in some specific cases, such as when printing from UNIX or other
operating system that does not support printer drivers.
<Action When Paper Size Mismatch>
Set whether printing goes ahead if a paper size other than the size loaded in the drawer is selected. You can also set
the machine not to go ahead with printing and instead display an alert message.
<Force Output>
<Display Error>
<Menu> <Printer Settings>
<Display Error>
<Action When Paper Size Mismatch>
<Image Quality Settings for Mobile Print>
Select the image processing when printing from a mobile device.
<Halftone>
<Gradation>
<Error Diffusion>
217
Select <Force Output> or
Setting Menu List
<Priority>
<Speed Priority>
<Image Quality Priority>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <Image Quality Settings for Mobile Print>
<Priority> Select the item <Apply>
Select <Halftone> or
● When <Priority> is set to <Speed Priority>, you cannot select <Error Diffusion>.
<Copies>
Set the number of copies to print.
1
to 999
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<Copies>
Set the number of copies to print
<2-Sided Printing>
Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<2-Sided Printing>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Default Paper>
Use this item to specify the paper size.
<Menu>
Available Paper(P. 318)
<Printer Settings>
<Default Paper>
218
Select the paper size
Setting Menu List
<Print Quality>
You can change settings related to print quality.
<Density>
Adjust the toner density.
17 Levels
<Density (Fine Adjust)>
<High>
17 Levels
<Medium>
17 Levels
<Low>
17 Levels
● The settings specified for <Density> are disabled when <Toner Save> is enabled.
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Density>
Adjust the density
<Apply>
<Toner Save>
You can save toner consumption when printing from a mobile device. Select <On> when you want to check the
layout or other appearance characteristics before proceeding to final printing of a large job.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Toner Save>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Special Print Mode>
Select <Special Settings 1> if a printed bar code is unreadable, or <Special Settings 2> if print results are partially
faded.
<Off>
<Special Settings 1>
<Special Settings 2>
219
Setting Menu List
<Menu> <Printer Settings>
1> or <Special Settings 2>
<Print Quality>
<Special Print Mode>
Select <Special Settings
<Resolution>
Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.
<1200 dpi>
<600 dpi>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Resolution>
Select <1200 dpi> or <600 dpi>
<Density Fine Adjustment>
Finely adjust the density. You can specify this setting only when <1200 dpi> is selected in <Resolution>.
-1 to 0
to +1
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<Print Quality>
<Density Fine Adjustment>
Specify the density
<Layout>
Specify the page layout settings such as binding position.
<Binding Location>
If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind on
the long or short edge.
<Long Edge>
<Short Edge>
<Menu>
Edge>
<Printer Settings>
<Layout>
220
<Binding Location>
Select <Long Edge> or <Short
Setting Menu List
<Long Edge>
Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.
<Short Edge>
Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.
<Timeout>
Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data reception
interruption.
5 to 15
to 300 (sec.)
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<Timeout>
Set the time period
<PCL>
Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.
<Paper Save>
Select whether to save paper by not outputting blank pages in documents. By selecting <On>, the machine will
not output blank pages. To output all your document data when printing, including any blank pages that you
have inserted in your document, select <Off>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Paper Save>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Orientation>
Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.
<Portrait>
<Landscape>
221
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Orientation>
Select <Portrait> or <Landscape>
<Font Number>
Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font
samples from the operation panel. PCL Font List(P. 257)
0
to 54
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Font Number>
Select the font number
<Point Size>
Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a proportionallyspaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.
4.00 to 12.00
to 999.75 (point)
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Point Size>
Specify the point size
<Pitch>
Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only
when a fixed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.
0.44 to 10.00
to 99.99 (cpi)
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Pitch>
Specify the pitch value
<Form Lines>
Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according to
the settings specified in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.
5 to 64
to 128 (lines)
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Form Lines>
222
Specify the number of lines
Setting Menu List
<Character Code>
Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specified setting is
ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specified in <Font Number>.
<DESKTOP>
<ISO4>
<ISO6>
<ISO11>
<ISO15>
<ISO17>
<ISO21>
<ISO60>
<ISO69>
<ISOL1>
<ISOL2>
<ISOL5>
<ISOL6>
<LEGAL>
<MATH8>
<MCTEXT>
<MSPUBL>
<PC775>
<PC8>
<PC850>
<PC852>
<PC8DN>
<PC8TK>
<PC1004>
<PIFONT>
<PSMATH>
<PSTEXT>
<ROMAN8>
<VNINTL>
<VNMATH>
<VNUS>
<WIN30>
<WINBALT>
<WINL1>
<WINL2>
<WINL5>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Character Code>
Select the character code
<Custom Paper>
Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension> and
<Y dimension>.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Custom Paper>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Unit of Measure>
Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.
<Millimeters>
<inches>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Unit of Measure>
223
Select <Millimeters> or <inches>
Setting Menu List
<X dimension>
Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.
77 to 215
(mm)
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<X dimension>
Specify the dimension
<Y dimension>
Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.
127 to 355
(mm)
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Y dimension>
Specify the dimension
<Append CR to LF>
Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is
selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If
<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.
<Yes>
<No>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Append CR to LF>
Select <Yes> or <No>
<Enlarge A4 Print Width>
Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of LTR
size.
<Off>
<On>
224
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Enlarge A4 Print Width>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Halftones>
You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and
darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of
image.
<Text>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<Resolution>
<Graphics>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<Resolution>
<Image>
<Color Tone>
<Gradation>
<Resolution>
<Menu> <Printer Settings> <PCL>
halftone reproduction method
<Halftones>
Select the type of image
Select the
Type of image
Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>
represents lines and figures, and <Image> represents photos and images.
<Color Tone>
Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data
such as photo image data.
<Gradation>
Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing figures or graphs
containing gradation areas.
225
Setting Menu List
<Resolution>
Produces a fine print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and fine lines.
<Feed A5 Horizontally>
Enable or disable horizontal feeding when printing A5 size.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<Printer Settings>
<PCL>
<Feed A5 Horizontally>
226
Select <Off> or <On>
Setting Menu List
<Paper Settings for Mobile Print>
29UE-04K
All the settings related to specifying the paper are listed with descriptions.
<Size/Type Settings>(P. 227)
<Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>(P. 227)
<Size/Type Settings>
Set the paper size and type.
<Custom>, <A4>, <A5R>, <B5>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FOOLSCAP>, <OFICIO>,
<No. 10 (COM10)>, <Monarch>, <Government-LTR>, <Government-LGL>, <India-LGL>, <AUS-FOOLSCAP>,
<Brazil-OFICIO>, <Mexico-OFICIO>, <F4A>, <3x5inch>, <Other Sizes>
<Plain (71-89 g/m²)>, <Plain L (61-70 g/m²)>, <Plain L2 (60 g/m²)>, <Recycled (71-89 g/m²)>, <Heavy 1
(90-105 g/m²)>, <Heavy 2 (106-120 g/m²)>, <Heavy 3 (121-163 g/m²)>, <Heavy 4 (121-163 g/m²)>,
<Envelope>, <Envelope H>, <Labels>, <Bond 1 (60-104 g/m²)>, <Bond 2 (105-163 g/m²)>
<Menu>
type
<Paper Settings for Mobile Print>
<Size/Type Settings>
Select the paper size and
<Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>
Set frequently used paper sizes. The paper sizes selected here are displayed as options in <Size/Type Settings>.
<Custom>, <A4>, <A5R>, <B5>, <DL>, <ISO-C5>, <LTR>, <LGL>, <STMT>, <EXEC>, <FOOLSCAP>, <OFICIO>,
<No. 10 (COM10)>, <Monarch>, <Government-LTR>, <Government-LGL>, <India-LGL>, <AUS-FOOLSCAP>,
<Brazil-OFICIO>, <Mexico-OFICIO>, <F4A>, <3x5inch>
<Menu> <Paper Settings for Mobile Print>
paper size that you want to set <Apply>
227
<Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>
Select the
Setting Menu List
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
29UE-04L
All the settings related to adjustment and maintenance are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger ( ).
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 228)
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
<Clean Fixing Assembly>(P. 231)
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>
Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridge or the drum
cartridge is low.
<Toner Cartridge>
<Drum Cartridge>
<Menu>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
Cartridge> or <Drum Cartridge>
<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>
Select <Toner
Enter the cartridge level
<Special Processing>
If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the
printouts.
<Special Printing Mode U>
Sometimes toner appears splattered around text or patterns in a printout. In such cases, setting this to <On>
may improve the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<On>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Special Processing>
<Special Printing Mode U>
● Setting this to <On> may affect the print quality for some types of paper (especially for lightweight
paper) or in some printing environments (especially in high humidity environments).
● When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, <Special Printing Mode R>, and <Special
Printing Mode T> are set to <Off> automatically.
228
Setting Menu List
<Special Printing Mode D>
Set this item when the printed paper turns out grayish or printing is faded.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<On>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Special Processing>
<Special Printing Mode D>
<Special Printing Mode A>
If streaks adhere to the print paper, changing this may improve the print quality. <Mode 2> can improve the
quality more significantly than <Mode 1>.
<Off>
<Mode 1>
<Mode 2>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance>
Select the mode
<Special Processing>
<Special Printing Mode A>
<Special Printing Mode G>
Printed images may fade or streaks may appear when the paper has a lot of paper dust. In such cases, setting
this to <On> may improve the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<On>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Special Processing>
<Special Printing Mode G>
<Special Printing Mode Q>
Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. In such cases, setting this to <On>
may improve the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
229
Setting Menu List
<Menu>
<On>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Special Processing>
<Special Printing Mode Q>
● Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality.
● When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode R>, and <Special
Printing Mode T> are set to <Off> automatically.
<Special Printing Mode R>
Printing may be faint when you print on the back of a printed sheet. In such cases, setting this to <On> may
improve the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<On>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Special Processing>
<Special Printing Mode R>
● If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of
time elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.
● When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, and <Special
Printing Mode T> are set to <Off> automatically.
<Special Printing Mode T>
Printing may be uneven when you print in a high-humidity environment. In such cases, setting this to <On> may
improve the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<On>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Special Processing>
<Special Printing Mode T>
● Printed images or text may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity
environment.
230
Setting Menu List
● When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, and <Special
Printing Mode R> are set to <Off> automatically.
<Special Printing Mode L>
Smudges may appear in a printout when the paper has a lot of paper dust or other dust particles. In such cases,
setting this to <On> may improve the quality of the printout.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<On>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Special Processing>
<Special Printing Mode L>
<Select Line Width>
If a printed barcode cannot be read, changing this may resolve the problem.
<Auto>
<Thin>
<Slightly Thin>
<Slightly Thick>
<Thick>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance>
line width
<Special Processing>
<Select Line Width>
<Special Processing>
<Enable Quiet Mode>
Select the
<Enable Quiet Mode>
Enable or disable Quiet Mode.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance>
<Off> or <On>.
Select
<Clean Fixing Assembly>
Clean the fixing assembly after the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on
printouts. Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 244)
231
Setting Menu List
<System Management Settings>
29UE-04R
All the settings related to System Management Settings are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a
dagger ( ).
<Network Settings>(P. 232)
<System Manager Information Settings>(P. 232)
<Device Information Settings>(P. 232)
<Security Settings>(P. 233)
<Select Country/Region>(P. 234)
<Remote UI Settings>(P. 235)
<Display Job Log>(P. 235)
<Use as USB Device>(P. 235)
<Enable Product Extended Survey Program>(P. 236)
<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>(P. 236)
<Google Cloud Print Settings>(P. 237)
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>(P. 237)
<Update Firmware>(P. 238)
<Initialize Eco Report Counter>(P. 238)
<Initialize Menu>(P. 238)
<Initialize All Data/Settings>(P. 238)
Asterisks (*)
● Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your
country or region.
<Network Settings>
See
<Network Settings>(P. 197) .
<System Manager Information Settings>
Specify the PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network Settings> and <System
Management Settings>. You can set the PIN from <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an
Administrator. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 145)
<System Manager PIN>
Enter a number for the System Manager PIN.
<System Manager Name>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.
<Device Information Settings>
Enter alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.
<Device Name>
232
Setting Menu List
<Location>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Device Information Settings> Select <Device
Name> or <Location> Enter the device name or location ( Entering Text(P. 94) ) <Apply>
<Security Settings>
Enable or disable settings for IP address packet filtering.
<Use TLS>
Select whether to use the TLS encrypted communication.
TLS(P. 160)
Configuring the Key and Certificate for
<Off>
<On>
<IPv4 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified IPv4 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 152)
<Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings>
Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<IPv4 Address
<IPv6 Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified IPv6 addresses.
Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 152)
< Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings>
Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<IPv6 Address
<MAC Address Filter>
Enable or disable settings for filtering packets received from devices with specified MAC addresses.
Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 155)
233
Setting Menu List
< Inbound Filter>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Security Settings>
Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>
<MAC Address
<Select Country/Region> *
Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting
selected at initial power-on.
<Austria (AT)>
<Belarus (BY)>
<Belgium (BE)>
<Czech Republic (CZ)>
<Denmark (DK)>
<Egypt (EG)>
<Finland (FI)>
<France (FR)>
<Germany (DE)>
<Greece (GR)>
<Hungary (HU)>
<Ireland (IE)>
<Italy (IT)>
<Jordan (JO)>
<Luxembourg (LU)>
<Netherlands (NL)>
<Norway (NO)>
<Poland (PL)>
<Portugal (PT)>
<Russia (RU)>
<Saudi Arabia (SA)>
<Slovenia (SI)>
<South Africa (ZA)>
<Spain (ES)>
<Sweden (SE)>
<Switzerland (CH)>
<Ukraine (UA)>
<Great Britain (GB)>
<Other>
<Menu>
region
<System Management Settings>
234
<Select Country/Region>
Select a country or
Setting Menu List
<Remote UI Settings>
Configure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to configure machine settings from a Web
browser.
<Use Remote UI>
Select whether to use the Remote UI.
Disabling Remote UI(P. 177)
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings>
<Off> or <On>
<Remote UI Settings>
<Use Remote UI>
Select
<Remote UI Access Security Settings>
Specify so that entry of a PIN is required for access to the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a
common PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 147)
<Off>
<On>
<Remote UI Access PIN>
<Menu> <System Management Settings>
Settings> <On> Enter a PIN <Apply>
<Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI Access Security
Enter the PIN (Confirm) <Apply>
<Display Job Log>
Select whether to display printing logs on the machine display.
<Off>
<On>
<Menu>
<System Management Settings>
<Display Job Log>
Select <Off> or <On>
<Use as USB Device>
Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer.
Connection with a Computer(P. 175)
235
Restricting the USB
Setting Menu List
<Off>
<On>
<Enable Product Extended Survey Program>
Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings>
<Off> or <On>
<Enable Product Extended Survey Program>
Select
<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>
Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or Toner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner
cartridges, etc. Also set whether to use Toner Status.
<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
<Off>
<On>
<Toner Status Settings>
<Off>
<On>
<Displ. Purchase Button>
<Off>
<On>
<Menu> <System Management Settings>
the settings
<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>
Specify
<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>
Select <Off> to prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges, etc. from being displayed in
the Remote UI.
<Toner Status Settings>
If you do not want to use Toner Status, select <Off>. To prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing
toner cartridges, etc. from being displayed in Toner Status, select <On> and then <Off>.
236
Setting Menu List
<Google Cloud Print Settings>
Enable or disable Google Cloud Print.
Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
<Enable Google Cloud Print>
<Off>
<On>
<Google Cloud Print Registration Status>
<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language
when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play.
<Network>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is detected over the network.
<UFRII LT>
<UFRII LT (V4)>
<PCL6>
<PCL6 (V4)>
<USB>
Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that
language when it is connected to a computer via USB.
<UFRII LT>
<UFRII LT (V4)>
<PCL6>
<PCL6 (V4)>
<Menu> <System Management Settings> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>
or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine
Select <Network>
<UFRII LT>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer.
<UFRII LT (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII LT printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specification (XPS).
<PCL6>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.
237
Setting Menu List
<PCL6 (V4)>
Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specification (XPS).
<Update Firmware>
Select how to install the firmware update according to the environment of the machine.
Firmware(P. 190)
Updating the
<Via PC>
<Via Internet>
<Version Information>
<Initialize Eco Report Counter>
Select to restore the Eco Report Counter settings to the factory defaults.
Initializing Eco Report Counter(P. 192)
<Initialize Menu>
Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,
or you can restore individual settings separately. Initializing Menu(P. 192)
<Preferences>
<Timer Settings>
<Common Settings>
<Printer Settings>
<Adjustment/Maintenance>
<System Management Settings>
<Initialize All>
<Initialize All Data/Settings>
Restores all data including logs and setting values to their default settings.
238
Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 193)
Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 240
Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 242
Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 243
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 244
Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 245
Replacing the Drum Cartridge .......................................................................................................................... 248
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 252
Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 253
Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 255
Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 256
Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 258
239
Maintenance
Maintenance
29UE-04S
This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and adjustment of print quality.
◼ Basic Cleaning
Regular Cleaning(P. 242)
◼ Replacing Consumables
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 252)
Consumables(P. 258)
240
Maintenance
◼ Adjusting and Managing the Machine
Relocating the Machine(P. 253)
Viewing the Counter Value(P. 255)
Printing Reports and Lists(P. 256)
241
Maintenance
Regular Cleaning
29UE-04U
Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.
Where to Clean
Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots
Cleaning the Exterior(P. 243)
Internal fixing assembly
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 244)
242
Maintenance
Cleaning the Exterior
29UE-04W
Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good
condition.
1
Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.
● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2
Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.
● Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.
● To locate the ventilation slots, see
Front Side(P. 77) .
3
Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.
4
Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.
243
Maintenance
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly
29UE-04X
Dirt may adhere to the fixing assembly inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean
the fixing assembly, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the fixing assembly when the
machine has documents waiting to be printed. To clean the fixing assembly, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set
the paper in the drawer before performing the following procedure. Loading Paper(P. 95)
● Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge. Make sure that there is sufficient amount
remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge beforehand.
Checking the Remaining Amount
of Consumables(P. 252)
1
Select <Menu> in the Home screen.
2
Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>.
3
Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.
4
Home Screen(P. 88)
Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the
machine, and select <Start>.
➠ Cleaning starts.
244
Maintenance
Replacing the Toner Cartridge
29UE-04Y
The machine displays a message when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low. Note that the print quality
may suffer if you continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner
cartridge on the display ( Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 252) ).
When a Message Appear(P. 245)
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 246)
When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridge. Depending on which message
is displayed, prepare a new toner cartridge ( Consumables(P. 258) ) or replace the current toner cartridge with a
new one ( Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 246) ).
<Preparing a toner cart. is recommended.>
This message notifies you that the toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
When this message is displayed
● When printing, you can continue printing the original.
Specify when this message is displayed
● You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers
this message. <Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 228)
<Toner cart. life end. Replcmt. recommended.>
This message notifies you that the toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that
you replace the toner cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be
guaranteed.
<Status Monitor>
Select <Status Monitor> <Error Information/Notification>
procedure for replacing the toner cartridge.
To replace a consumable
245
<Toner Cartridge End of Lifetime> to display the
Maintenance
● Press and hold the Back key. On the <Output Report> screen, print the consumables status report to
find out the cartridge name. Printing Reports and Lists(P. 256)
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge
When you replace the toner cartridge, simple instructions on the replacement procedure are displayed on the screen.
See the on-screen instructions as well as the following procedure.
1
Close the paper stopper, and then open the toner cover.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge, such
as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak. Remove
the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
3
1
Remove the new toner cartridge from the protective package.
Pull the tab of the protective package on a flat place.
246
Maintenance
2
4
Pull out the toner cartridge.
Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner
inside the cartridge, and then place it on a flat surface.
5
Replace the toner cartridge.
6
Close the toner cover.
LINKS
Consumables(P. 258)
247
Maintenance
Replacing the Drum Cartridge
29UE-050
The machine displays a message when the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is low. Note that the print quality
may suffer if you continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the drum
cartridge on the display ( Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 252) ).
When a Message Appear(P. 248)
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 249)
When a Message Appear
The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the drum cartridge. Depending on which
message is displayed, prepare a new drum cartridge ( Consumables(P. 258) ) or replace the current drum cartridge
with a new one ( Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 249) ).
<Preparing a drum cart. is recommended.>
This message notifies you that the drum cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a
replacement drum cartridge ready. Replace the drum cartridge if you see this message before you start to print
a large job.
When this message is displayed
● When printing, you can continue printing the original.
Specify when this message is displayed
● You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge that triggers
this message. <Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 228)
<Drum cart. life end. Replcmt. recommended.>
This message notifies you that the drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that
you replace the drum cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be
guaranteed.
<Status Monitor>
Select <Status Monitor> <Error Information/Notification>
procedure for replacing the drum cartridge.
To replace a consumable
248
<Drum Cartridge End of Lifetime> to display the
Maintenance
● Press and hold the Back key. On the <Output Report> screen, print the consumables status report to
find out the cartridge name. Printing Reports and Lists(P. 256)
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge
When you replace the drum cartridge, simple instructions on the replacement procedure are displayed on the screen.
See the on-screen instructions as well as the following procedure.
1
Close the paper stopper, and then open the toner cover.
2
Remove the toner cartridge.
Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge, such
as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak. Remove
the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
3
Remove the drum cartridge.
249
Maintenance
Do not shake or tilt the drum cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the drum cartridge, such
as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the drum cartridge to leak. Remove
the drum cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
4
Remove the new drum cartridge from the protective bag.
5
Replace the drum cartridge.
6
Insert the toner cartridge.
250
Maintenance
7
Close the toner cover.
LINKS
Consumables(P. 258)
251
Maintenance
Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables
29UE-051
Use the procedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, etc. It is particularly important to
check whether you need to have a new toner cartridge or a new drum cartridge ready before starting a large print job.
<Status Monitor>
<Device Information>
<Cartridge Level>
Amount Remaining in Toner Cartridge
Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge.
Amount Remaining in Drum Cartridge
Displays the amount remaining in the drum cartridge.
● The displayed amount remaining in the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge can be used only as a guide
and may differ from the actual amount.
● Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the amount remaining in the toner cartridge
or the drum cartridge reaches its lifetime.
LINKS
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Consumables(P. 258)
252
Maintenance
Relocating the Machine
29UE-052
The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedure below when moving the machine to avoid injury, and also
make sure to read the safety precautions before you begin. Important Safety Instructions(P. 2)
1
Turn OFF the machine and computer.
● When you turn OFF the machine, data that is waiting to be printed is deleted.
2
Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the
illustration below.
● Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.
Power plug
Power cord
USB cable*
LAN cable*
3
When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridge
and the drum cartridge.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 246)
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 249)
4
Open the front cover and remove any paper.
● If the paper guides are extended, return them so that they fit in the drawer.
5
Close the front cover, paper stopper, and all similar parts, and then move the
machine to a new location.
253
Maintenance
● Check how heavy the machine is and carry it without straining.
Hold the lift handles, and lift up the machine.
6
Main Unit(P. 315)
Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.
● For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see "Getting Started."
Their Contents(P. 327)
254
Manuals and
Maintenance
Viewing the Counter Value
29UE-053
You can check total for the number of pages used for printouts. The number of printouts includes printouts of the list
as well as printouts of data from computers.
<Status Monitor>
printed
<Device Information>
255
<Check Counter>
Check the number of pages
Maintenance
Printing Reports and Lists
29UE-054
You can print reports and lists to check information such as machine settings.
Printing Lists of Settings(P. 256)
Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine(P. 256)
Printing Lists of Settings
You can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.
User Data List
You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 195) ) as well as the content that has been
registered in the machine by printing a User Data List.
<Menu> <Output Reports> <User Data List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed
on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine
You can print the following machine status reports.
Eco Report
You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report
includes tips that are useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.
<Menu> <Output Reports> <Eco Report> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on
the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
● The amount of power consumption may vary depending on the environment and conditions where
the machine is used.
Consumables Status Report
You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.
256
Maintenance
<Menu> <Output Reports> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size and type of
paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
PCL Font List
You can check the list of fonts available in PCL mode with a report.
<Menu> <Output Reports> <PCL Font List>
on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK>
Check that the size and type of paper displayed
<Yes>
Cartridge Log Report
You can check the usage logs of the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge with a report.
<Menu> <Output Reports> <Cartridge Log Report> Check that the size and type of paper
displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine <OK> <Yes>
257
Maintenance
Consumables
29UE-055
The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in
this machine. Purchase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe
safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables. For optimum
print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is recommended.
● To handle and store consumables, observe precautions in "Getting Started" provided for this product.
● Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or original type, you may need to replace
consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.
◼ Toner Cartridges
Supplied Toner Cartridge
The average yield and the weight of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.
● Average yield*
1,000 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.3 Kg
Replacement Toner Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield and weight of toner cartridge
Canon Toner Cartridge 051
Canon Toner Cartridge 051H
● Average yield*
1,700 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.3 Kg
● Average yield*
4,100 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.4 Kg
*The
average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner
cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer
components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default
print density setting.
258
Maintenance
Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges
● Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of
counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.
● When replacing toner cartridge, see
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245) .
◼ Drum Cartridge
Supplied Drum Cartridge
The average yield and the weight of the drum cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.
● Average yield*
23,000 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.2 Kg
Replacement Drum Cartridges
For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine drum cartridges is recommended.
Canon Genuine Drum Cartridge Average yield and weight of drum cartridge
Canon Drum Cartridge 051
● Average yield*
23,000 sheets
● Weight
Approx. 0.2 Kg
*The
average yield is on the basis of our evaluation criteria when printing at 2-sheet intervals (2-sheet intermittent) of plain
A4 size paper.
Be careful of counterfeit drum cartridges
● Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon drum cartridges in the marketplace. Use of
counterfeit drum cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not
responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit drum cartridge.
For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.
259
Maintenance
● When replacing drum cartridge, see
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248) .
260
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 262
Common Problems ............................................................................................................................................ 264
Installation/Settings Problems ..................................................................................................................... 265
Printing Problems ......................................................................................................................................... 269
When You Cannot Print Properly ...................................................................................................................... 272
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ............................................................................................................ 274
Paper Creases or Curls ................................................................................................................................. 283
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ................................................................................................................................ 285
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed ........................................................ 286
Countermeasures for Each Message ............................................................................................................ 287
Countermeasures for Each Error Code ......................................................................................................... 298
Clearing Paper Jams .......................................................................................................................................... 299
Paper Jams inside the Machine ..................................................................................................................... 300
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved .................................................................................................................. 304
261
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
29UE-056
When a problem occurs, check this chapter to find out solutions before contacting Canon.
◼ Common Problems
This section describes how to take action when you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning.
Problems(P. 264)
Common
◼ When You Cannot Print Properly
This section describes how to take action when printing results are not satisfactory or the paper creases or curls.
When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 272)
◼ A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) is Displayed
This section describes how to take action when a message or error code (three digits) appears on the display.
Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed(P. 286)
◼ Clearing Paper Jams
This section describes how to take action when a paper is jammed.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 299)
◼ When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
If a problem persists, see
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 304) to find out where to contact.
262
A
Troubleshooting
263
Troubleshooting
Common Problems
29UE-057
If you encounter problems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the
problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Check the Following
Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?
● If the machine is turned ON but does not respond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected
correctly, and turn it back ON. For information on connecting the power cord, see Getting Started.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 327)
Are the LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly?
● Check whether these cables are connected correctly.
Back Side(P. 79)
Is sleep mode activated?
● If you leave the machine unattended for a specific period of time, it enters sleep mode for power
conservation, not allowing you to operate it.
To cancel sleep mode, press any key other than the power switch.
Is any message displayed on the screen?
● If a problem occurs, a message is displayed.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 287)
If a problem persists even after checking
Click the link that corresponds to the problem.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 265)
Printing Problems(P. 269)
264
Troubleshooting
Installation/Settings Problems
29UE-058
See
Common Problems(P. 264) also.
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection(P. 265)
Problem with the USB Connection(P. 268)
Problem with the Print Server(P. 268)
Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection
The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time.
● The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time. The following can be used at the
same time: a USB cable and a wireless LAN, or a USB cable and a wired LAN.
Remote UI is not displayed.
● Are <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?
Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 176)
Disabling Remote UI(P. 177)
● If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN, check that the Wi-Fi icon is displayed in the Home screen and
that the IP address is set correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Home Screen(P. 88)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
● If the machine is connected to a wired LAN, check that the cable is connected firmly and the IP address is set
correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.
Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 25)
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
● Are you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine's IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do
not use the proxy server) in the Web browser's proxy settings dialog.
● Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, the
Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4 Address
Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 151)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 233)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 233)
<MAC Address Filter> (P. 233)
A connection to a network cannot be established.
● The IP address may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.
Setting IP Addresses(P. 38)
● When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 266)
265
Troubleshooting
You are unsure of the set IP address.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a
wireless LAN.
● Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is
required to have the machine switch to your selection.
Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 24)
You are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be
connected. The SSID is not displayed on the screen.
● Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box.
● Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access
point list.
● Check whether the SSID is correct.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
● If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden (using a stealth mode*), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless
router.
*A
mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other devices.
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 266)
The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup
router is connected to a network).
● If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast
packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are
correct.
● If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even
if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.
● If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the
devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings
are correct.
When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN
Check the status of your computer.
● Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed?
● Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable)
correctly plugged in?
● Is the wireless router turned on?
266
Troubleshooting
If the problem persists even after checking the above:
● Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again.
● Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.
Check whether the machine is turned ON.
● If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then turn it back ON.
Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.
● Is the machine too far from the wireless router?
● Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?
● Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that
emit radio waves near the machine?
Perform one of the following settings again.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 28)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 30)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 32)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
When you need to manually set up the connection
If the wireless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN
connection ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34) ).
● ANY connection refusal* is activated.
● The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.
● The stealth mode is activated.
*A
function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY"
or is blank.
When you need to change the settings of the wireless router
If the wireless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.
● The MAC address packet filtering is set.
267
Troubleshooting
● When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2
encryption method is set to TKIP.
Problem with the USB Connection
Cannot communicate.
● Change the USB cable. If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one.
● If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.
Problem with the Print Server
You cannot find the print server to connect to.
● Are the print server and computer connected correctly?
● Is the print server running?
● Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator.
● Is [Network discovery] enabled?
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 334)
You cannot connect to a shared printer.
● On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed,
contact the network or server administrator.
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 335)
268
Troubleshooting
Printing Problems
29UE-059
See
Common Problems(P. 264) also.
Printing results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls.
When You
Cannot Print Properly(P. 272)
You cannot print.
● Can you print a Windows test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the
machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application.
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 336)
If you cannot print a test page, check the following according to your environment.
Wireless LAN connection
● Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
● If the connection is poor, try the following.
- Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to
be at least five channels apart.
- If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power.
● If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same
wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine.
Viewing Network Settings(P. 45)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 340)
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
When you reset wireless LAN connection settings
● As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected.
● Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 338)
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
● Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered,
you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4
Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 151)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 233)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 233)
<MAC Address Filter> (P. 233)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 72)
269
Troubleshooting
● Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Wired LAN connection
● Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 338)
Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
● Is communication not limited by the firewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is
incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation
panel to set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.
Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 151)
<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 233)
<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 233)
<MAC Address Filter> (P. 233)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 72)
● Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
USB connection
● Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer
driver. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct port is created automatically.
Checking the Printer Port(P. 338)
Installing Drivers(P. 72)
● Is bidirectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer.
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 339)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Connect to another USB port on the computer.
● Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
Via print server
● Can you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between
the print server and your computer.
Problem with the Print Server(P. 268)
● Disable security software and other resident software.
● Reinstall the printer driver.
Installing Drivers(P. 72)
● Can you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
● Has an error occurred? Check the job log.
Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 121)
Printing seems to be slow. *
● Print or delete data in memory.
270
Troubleshooting
* When the free space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer
does. There is nothing abnormal.
You cannot print with Google Cloud Print.
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
It takes a long time before printing starts.
● Did you print to narrow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to
maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the
machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.
271
Troubleshooting
When You Cannot Print Properly
29UE-05A
If printing results are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist,
contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.
◼ Problems with Image Quality
Smudge Marks Appear on the
Edge of Printouts(P. 274)
Toner Smudges and Splatters
Appear(P. 275)
Streaks Appear/Printing is
Uneven(P. 278)
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory(P. 274)
Smudges Appear on
Printouts(P. 274)
Printouts Are Faded(P. 276)
Printouts Are Entirely or
Partially Grayish(P. 279)
272
Afterimages Appear in Blank
Areas(P. 275)
A Portion of the Page Is Not
Printed(P. 278)
White Spots Appear(P. 280)
Troubleshooting
Spots Appear(P. 281)
Reverse Side of Paper is
Smudged(P. 281)
◼ Problems with Printout Paper
Paper Creases(P. 283)
◼ Problems with Paper Feed
Printouts Are Skewed(P. 285)
Printed Barcode Cannot Be
Read(P. 282)
Paper Creases or Curls(P. 283)
Paper Curls(P. 283)
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly(P. 285)
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 285)
273
Troubleshooting
Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory
29UE-05C
Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results. Perform care and cleaning to the machine first.
Cleaning(P. 242)
Regular
Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check the supported paper types and replace with an appropriate type. Also, set the paper size and type
correctly.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 106)
Do you print data without margins?
● This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the
edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make
sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings]
[Expand Print Region and Print]
[Off]
Smudges Appear on Printouts
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
● If using the appropriate paper still does not solve the problem, changing the <Special Printing Mode A>
setting may solve the problem. <Mode 2> can improve the quality more significantly than <Mode 1>.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
274
Troubleshooting
Afterimages Appear in Blank Areas
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
● Setting <Special Printing Mode U> to <On> may solve the problem.
275
Troubleshooting
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
Are you using paper containing much paper dust or other dust particles?
● Smudges may appear in a printout when the paper has a lot of paper dust or other dust particles. Setting
<Special Printing Mode L> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Printouts Are Faded
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 106)
Are you using paper containing much paper dust?
● Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. Setting <Special
Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
276
Troubleshooting
Are you using rough-surface paper?
● Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. Setting <Special Printing
Mode Q> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
● Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality.
Are you using the machine in an environment with high humidity?
● Setting <Special Printing Mode T> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
● Printed images or text may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity environment.
Did you print on the back of a printed sheet?
● Printing may be faint when you print on the back of a printed sheet. Setting <Special Printing Mode R> to
<On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
● If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time
elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.
Is the machine installed in the appropriate environment?
● Install the printer in an appropriate location.
Installation(P. 3)
Relocating the Machine(P. 253)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
277
Troubleshooting
A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed
Do you print data without margins?
● This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 5 mm or less around the
edge of paper or 10 mm or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the machine. Make
sure to have margins around the document to print.
[Finishing] tab
[Advanced Settings]
[Expand Print Region and Print]
[Off]
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
● If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, part of a document may not be printed.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Have you cleaned the fixing unit?
● Clean the fixing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 244)
Are you using rough-surface paper?
● Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. Setting <Special Printing
Mode Q> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
278
Troubleshooting
● Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality.
Are you using the machine in an environment with high humidity?
● Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode T>. Setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
● Printed images or text may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity environment.
Are you using paper containing much paper dust?
● Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. Setting <Special
Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Printouts Are Entirely or Partially Grayish
Are you using a specific type of paper?
● The printed side may come out in grayish color for certain type of paper. Check the type of paper you are
using and try a different type.
Available Paper(P. 318)
● Setting <Special Printing Mode U> or <Special Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the problem.
279
Troubleshooting
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
● A desirable effect may not be attained even with these settings applied.
Is the machine installed in the appropriate environment?
● Install the printer in an appropriate location.
Installation(P. 3)
Relocating the Machine(P. 253)
● Store the toner cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This
may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Has the drum cartridge been left in direct sunlight for a long period of time?
● Store the drum cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This
may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
White Spots Appear
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
280
Troubleshooting
Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?
● Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as
necessary.
● Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its
lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Spots Appear
Have you cleaned the fixing unit?
● Clean the fixing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 244)
Reverse Side of Paper is Smudged
Have you loaded paper that is smaller than the size of the print data?
● Check to make sure that the paper size matches the size of the print data.
Have you cleaned the fixing unit?
● Clean the fixing unit.
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 244)
Do smudges appear on 2-sided printed paper?
● The back side of the paper may become smudged during 2-sided printing. Setting <Special Printing Mode
R> to <On> may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
281
Troubleshooting
● If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time
elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.
Printed Barcode Cannot Be Read
Are you trying to read a small barcode or one with thick lines?
● Enlarge the barcode.
● Changing the <Select Line Width> setting may solve the problem.
<Special Processing>(P. 228)
282
Troubleshooting
Paper Creases or Curls
29UE-05E
Paper Creases
Is paper loaded correctly?
● If paper is not loaded below the load limit line or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Paper Curls
Are you using appropriate paper?
● Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings
properly.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 106)
● Change the setting of <Paper Type> to a setting for thinner paper. For example, if the current setting is
<Plain (71-89 g/m²)>, change it to <Plain L (61-70 g/m²)> or <Plain L2 (60 g/m²)>.
283
Troubleshooting
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 106)
Available Paper(P. 318)
● Reload the paper by changing the side to print on (front side/back side).
● In rare cases the symptom may become worse depending on the paper. If this occurs, change the side to
print on back to the previous side.
Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?
● Replace with appropriate paper.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
284
Troubleshooting
Paper Is Fed Incorrectly
29UE-05F
Printouts Are Skewed
Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?
● If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Are you printing on curled envelopes?
● Uncurl the envelopes, and print again.
Loading Envelopes(P. 102)
Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together
Is paper loaded correctly?
● Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together.
● Check whether paper is loaded correctly.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
● Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is
used.
Available Paper(P. 318)
Loading Paper(P. 95)
● Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.
● There are cases where the paper does not load properly depending on its thickness. If this occurs, reverse
the paper orientation, or flip the paper over.
285
Troubleshooting
A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error
Code) Is Displayed
29UE-05H
When a message appears on the machine's display, or a number (error code) prefixed with "#" appears, see the
following sections to check the solution.
Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 287)
Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 298)
286
Troubleshooting
Countermeasures for Each Message
29UE-05J
A message appears on the display when there is a problem with print processing, when the machine cannot
communicate, or when some other problem prevents normal operation. Find out more information about messages in
the following list.
A counterfeit or non-Canon drum cartridge may be in use.
The drum cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
● Only genuine Canon drum cartridges should be used as replacement drum cartridges.
Consumables(P. 258)
A counterfeit or non-Canon toner cartridge may be in use.
The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.
● Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 258)
Amount in cart. cannot be displ. correctly. (for toner cartridge)
The toner cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the toner cartridge.
● Reinstall the toner cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the toner
cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge, or consult
the Canon Customer Help Center.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
You might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.
● We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.
Consumables(P. 258)
Amount in cart. cannot be displ. correctly. (for drum cartridge)
The drum cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the drum cartridge.
● Reinstall the drum cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the drum
cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the store where you purchased the drum cartridge, or consult
the Canon Customer Help Center.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
You might not be using a Canon genuine drum cartridge.
● We recommend Canon genuine drum cartridges as replacement drum cartridges.
Consumables(P. 258)
287
Troubleshooting
Cannot connect using Direct Connection.
An error has occurred while starting Access Point Mode.
● Set an IP address other than "192.168.22.xx". If you still cannot connect, check the subnet mask setting.
For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting IPv4 Address(P. 39)
Cannot connect using Direct Connection. Check the network connection.
Access Point Mode was started without the device being connected to the access point.
● Start Access Point Mode after connecting the device with the access point.
Cannot find the access point.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a
specific period of time.
● Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 28)
Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 30)
An SSID of a wireless router was entered, but the entry was incorrect.
● Check the SSID and enter the correct one again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.
● Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 265)
● If the problem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.
Cart. Comm. Error A counterfeit or non-Canon drum cart. may be in use.
The drum cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.
● Re-install the drum cartridge. If re-installing the drum cartridge fails to clear the error message, the drum
cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the drum cartridge or consult the Canon
Customer Help Center.
Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 249)
Cart. Comm. Error A counterfeit or non-Canon toner cart. may be in use.
The toner cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.
288
Troubleshooting
● Re-install the toner cartridge. If re-installing the toner cartridge fails to clear the error message, the toner
cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge or consult the Canon
Customer Help Center.
Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 246)
Check the authentication settings.
The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the
RADIUS server.
● Check that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the
correct authentication method.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 170)
Cooling down... Wait a moment, then try again.
The temperature of the fixing assembly is high.
● Wait for a while until the fixing assembly cools down. After the temperature of the fixing assembly falls, try
the operation again.
Cooling down... Wait a moment.
The temperature of the fixing assembly is high.
● Wait for a while until the fixing assembly cools down. After the temperature of the fixing assembly falls,
the message will disappear.
Could not connect. (for Access Point Mode connection)
Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.
● Wait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, turn OFF the machine, and then turn it back
on again.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 127)
Could not connect. (for Easy Connection via PC connection)
An error has occurred while starting Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode).
● Press the Back key to return to the previous screen, and then try <Easy Connection via PC> again.
● If the same message still appears after retrying <Easy Connection via PC>, turn OFF the machine, and then
turn it back on again.
289
Troubleshooting
Could not connect. Check the PSK settings.
The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 32)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
● If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly
installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 265)
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. (for wireless LAN connection)
A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.
● Restart the machine and set again.
● If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed
and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 265)
● If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the
wireless router.
Could not connect using the wireless LAN. (for wireless LAN communication)
Wireless LAN communication failed due to an error.
● Wait for a while, and set again. If you still cannot get connection, turn OFF the machine and then restart it.
Could not connect using WPS.
When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.
● Wait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.
If WPS is supported:
Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.
Installation/Settings Problems(P. 265)
If WPS is not supported:
Set using another connecting method.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.
Mobile device detection was not possible within the predetermined length of time.
● Connect again paying attention to the time limit.
290
Troubleshooting
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 127)
Could not perform cleaning.
Paper jammed during cleaning.
● Remove the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 299)
Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 244)
Could not perform Shared Key auth. Check WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
● Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 32)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
● Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Could not set the current date and time.
The communication failed due to a network error and a timeout occurred.
● Check the network environment that the machine connects with.
● Use <Current Date/Time Settings> to set the time manually, or, in [SNTP Settings], clear the [Use SNTP]
check box.
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 20)
Configuring SNTP(P. 70)
Could not update the device time because its battery has run out. Cannot
use Google Cloud Print if the time settings are incorrect.
The machine's battery has run out and the correct time settings could not be kept.
● Set the correct time again.
Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 20)
291
Troubleshooting
Direct Connection terminated.
Connection with the mobile device was interrupted.
● Establish Direct Connection again.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 127)
Direct Connection terminated. Check network connection.
Connection with the mobile device was interrupted.
● Establish Direct Connection again.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 127)
Drum Cart. Life End Replace the drum cartridge.
The drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Drum cart. life end. Replcmt. recommended.
The drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replacement of the drum cartridge is recommended.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Drum cart. reached end of lifetime.
The drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Easy Connection via PC ended due to timeout.
A connection to the computer has not been established for 30 minutes since Easy Connection via PC
(cableless setup mode) started.
● Press the Back key to return to the previous screen, and then try <Easy Connection via PC> again.
292
Troubleshooting
Google Cloud Print not avail. Server auth err
Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.
● Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specified.
<Date/Time Settings>(P. 211)
Google Cloud Print not avail. Server comm err
Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.
● Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wireless LAN.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
● A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a firewall or other protection. Check whether the
5222 port is available with your computer.
● If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server
are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.
Setting a Proxy(P. 158)
Incorrect number of characters/invalid characters entered.
The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.
● Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine
again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your
networking devices or contact your manufacturer.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 32)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
Insert the drum cartridge.
The drum cartridge is not set or properly set.
● Properly set the drum cartridge.
Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 248)
Insert the toner cartridge.
The toner cartridge is not set or properly set.
● Properly set the toner cartridge.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
293
Troubleshooting
Maximum number of wireless devices connected w/ Direct Connection has
been reached. To connect other devices, terminate some of current
connections.
The number of directly connected mobile devices is at a maximum.
● To connect other devices by Direct Connection, disconnect current device(s) and try connecting again.
Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 127)
No Paper: XXXX*
*<Drawer
1> or <MP Tray> is displayed for XXXX.
Paper is not loaded in the drawer or the multi-purpose tray.
● Load the paper.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded.
● Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 106)
No reply from the destination.
A network cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.
● Check the status of the network cables and switches.
No response from host.
The machine is not connected to a network correctly.
● Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.
Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 22)
Paper jammed.
Paper jams.
● Remove the jammed paper, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).
Clearing Paper Jams(P. 299)
294
Troubleshooting
Preparing a drum cart. is recommended.
Drum cartridge replacement time is near.
● Replace the drum cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job.
Consumables(P. 258)
Preparing a toner cart. is recommended.
Toner cartridge replacement time is near.
● Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job.
Consumables(P. 258)
Set the correct authentication information.
The client authentication information (key and certificate, user name and password, or CA certificate) is
not set correctly.
● Check the specified authentication method and authentication information (key and certificate, user name
and password, and CA certificate).
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 170)
Size/Settings Mismatch
The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.
● Match the paper size setting specified in <Paper Settings for Mobile Print> and the size of the paper that is
actually loaded.
To use the loaded paper
Change the setting of <Paper Settings for Mobile Print> to match the loaded paper size.
Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 106)
● If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded
paper size.
To load paper without changing the settings
Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings for Mobile Print>.
Loading Paper(P. 95)
The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Print?
The document being printed contains a page with a very large amount of data.
● Select whether to print as far as the portion scanned into memory or to cancel the job.
295
Troubleshooting
The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.
The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.
● Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.
Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 37)
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 32)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to
"Open System."
● Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to
<Open System>.
Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 32)
Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 34)
● Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For
more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or
contact your manufacturer.
Toner Cart. Life End Replace the toner cartridge.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Toner cart. life end. Replcmt. recommended.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Toner cart. reached end of lifetime.
The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.
● Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 245)
Turn main power OFF and ON. If device does not recover, contact your
dealer or service representative.
An error has occurred with the machine.
296
Troubleshooting
● Turn OFF the power switch, wait 10 seconds, and turn it back ON. If the problem persists, turn OFF the
power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon
help line. Be sure to provide the displayed <Ennn-nnnn>.
Use Remote UI to set info. necessary for authentication.
The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.
● Check whether [Login Name] is set correctly.
● Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.
● If using TLS, check whether a "key and certificate" is registered.
● If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.
Configuring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 170)
297
Troubleshooting
Countermeasures for Each Error Code
29UE-05K
If an error occurs such as when printing is not successful, the corresponding error code is displayed in the job log
screen as a three-digit number. Check the following to find out causes and solutions for each error code. For details of
the job log screen, see <Status Monitor> Screen(P. 89) .
#852
The machine turns OFF for some reason.
● Check whether the power plug is inserted into an outlet firmly.
#853
A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine's upper processing
capability.
● The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages. Reduce the number of pages per
printing, or print when no print job is queued or no document is being printed. If you are still unable to
print, check the document data for any defects.
Printing was canceled from the computer.
● If you cancel an operation when the print data is being sent to the machine from a computer, this error
code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print again as necessary.
298
Troubleshooting
Clearing Paper Jams
29UE-05L
If a paper jams, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the screen. Press
to display simple solutions. If it is difficult to
understand the procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.
Output tray
Paper Jams inside the
Machine(P. 300)
Inside of the machine
Paper Jams inside the
Machine(P. 300)
Back cover
Paper Jams inside the
Machine(P. 300)
When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine
● Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed.
If paper tears
● Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.
If paper jams repeatedly
● Tap the paper stack on a flat surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.
● Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine.
Available Paper(P. 318)
● Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machine.
● If you use paper with a coarse surface, set <Paper Type> to <Bond 1 (60-104 g/m²)> or <Bond 2 (105-163 g/
m²)>.
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 107)
Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 108)
Printing from a Computer(P. 117)
Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine
● Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local
authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 304)
299
Troubleshooting
Paper Jams inside the Machine
29UE-05R
Remove the jammed paper according to the procedure below. Do not forcibly remove jammed paper from the
machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.
1
Close the paper stopper, and then open the toner cover.
2
Remove the cartridges.
1
Remove the toner cartridge.
Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge,
such as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak.
Remove the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
2
Remove the drum cartridge.
300
Troubleshooting
Do not shake or tilt the drum cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the drum cartridge,
such as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the drum cartridge to leak.
Remove the drum cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.
3
Gently pull out the paper.
4
Check whether paper is jammed inside the paper output guide.
1
Pull out toward you while pressing the button (
2
Gently pull out the paper.
3
Close the paper output guide.
301
) to open the paper output guide.
Troubleshooting
5
1
Check whether paper is jammed inside the machine.
Gently pull out the paper.
● Hold both edges of the paper, pull the leading edge of the paper down, and then pull it out.
6
Check whether paper is jammed in the back cover.
1
Open the back cover.
2
Gently pull out the paper.
3
Close the back cover.
7
1
Insert the cartridges.
Insert the drum cartridge.
302
Troubleshooting
2
8
Insert the toner cartridge.
Close the toner cover.
➠ The paper jam message disappears, and the machine is ready to print.
303
Troubleshooting
When a Problem Cannot Be Solved
29UE-05S
If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon
dealer or the Canon help line.
Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself
● If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.
◼ When Contacting Canon
When contacting us, have the following information ready:
● Product name (LBP162dw)
● Dealer where you purchased the machine
● Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)
● Serial number (found on the label on the back side of the machine)
Checking the serial number from the operation panel
● Select <Status Monitor>
<Device Information>
<Serial Number>.
304
Appendix
Appendix
Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 306
Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 307
Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 308
Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 309
Improving Efficiency ..................................................................................................................................... 311
So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 312
Specifications .................................................................................................................................................... 314
Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 315
Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 318
Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 321
Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 323
System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 324
Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 325
Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 327
Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 328
Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 329
Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 332
Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 334
Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 342
305
Appendix
Appendix
29UE-05U
This chapter contains technical specifications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,
copyright information, and other important information for customers.
◼ Machine Specifications
See the following section(s) when you want to check the specifications of the machine, network environment, print
function, and so on.
Specifications(P. 314)
◼ Referencing the Manual of This Machine
See the first of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of
the machine and how to operate the machine. When you want to know how to read and use the User's Guide (this
manual), see the second section.
Manuals and Their Contents(P. 327)
Using User's Guide(P. 328)
◼ Others
See the following section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright
information.
Third Party Software(P. 307)
Feature Highlights(P. 308)
Basic Windows Operations(P. 334)
Notice(P. 342)
306
Appendix
Third Party Software
29UE-05W
For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s).
307
Appendix
Feature Highlights
29UE-05X
This section describes tips for leveraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features
according to your intended purposes and operating environment.
Going Green and Saving Money(P. 309)
Improving Efficiency(P. 311)
So Much More(P. 312)
308
Appendix
Going Green and Saving Money
29UE-05Y
There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.
2-Sided Printing
Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet
You can use the 2-sided printing function to print data
from your computer. Because you'll only be using half
the paper you would otherwise, you can cut your paper
costs in half. To save even more, combine 2-sided
printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on one
sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single
sheet, which is both economical and environmentally
friendly.
When there are many pages in a document, the printout
can be inconveniently bulky - hard to to carry around
and store, and also hard to read. But there is a solution.
Print multiple pages onto one sheet! This allows you to
save paper and make your documents slimmer and
easier to handle. It is even more effective when
combined with 2-sided printing.
Printing from a Computer(P. 117)
Printing from a Computer(P. 117)
Sleep Mode
You can save power by setting the machine to enter sleep mode automatically
whenever it has not been used for a while. You don't need to turn OFF the
power each time, but you can still have the machine minimize its power
consumption. This convenient function works in the background to save power
and money every day.
309
Appendix
Entering Sleep Mode(P. 114)
310
Appendix
Improving Efficiency
29UE-060
Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more efficient.
Remote Management with Remote UI
Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive
Operation
Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all
without having to go over to the machine. Configure
You can easily specify the page layout as well as
binding position, etc. intuitively on the preview
image in the printer driver. The simple clickoperation allows you to conveniently make settings
while viewing how settings are applied.
settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with an
intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that
you'll master immediately. Save your time and energy for
things other than taking care of the machine.
Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)
(P. 178)
311
Printing from a Computer(P. 117)
Appendix
So Much More
29UE-061
There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the office, or even on the road.
Using a smartphone/tablet
Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print
At times such as when you want to quickly print out a
proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a
business destination, Canon PRINT Business comes in handy.
Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can
connect to the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and
directly.
PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities
for work/play with functionality made for this age of speed.
Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or
cell phone, send your data, and out come your
printed documents. With this machine, Google
Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever
you want from wherever you want.
Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 124)
Go Wireless
312
Using Google Cloud Print(P. 138)
Appendix
No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've got a WPS wireless
LAN router, bypass the settings process altogether and be ready to go before
you know it. Enjoy the kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that
you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE 802.11b/g/n for stress-free
wireless, and also supports WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for
tighter security.
Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 26)
313
Appendix
Specifications
29UE-062
Specifications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.
◼ Machine Specifications
Main Unit(P. 315)
Available Paper(P. 318)
◼ Functional Specifications
Printer Functions(P. 321)
Management Functions(P. 323)
◼ Environment To Use the Machine
System Environment(P. 324)
Network Environment(P. 325)
314
Appendix
Main Unit
29UE-063
● For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source, see "
Name
Canon LBP162dw
Type
Desktop
Color Supported
Black and White
Resolution for Writing
600 x 600 dpi
Gradation
256 Gradation Levels
Acceptable Paper Stock
Paper Sizes
● Max: 215.9 x 355.6 mm*1
● Min: 76.2 x 127.0 mm*1
Paper Weight
● Drawer: 60 to 163 g/m²
● Multi-Purpose Tray: 60 to 163 g/m²
Paper Type
Available Paper(P. 318)
Warm-Up Time
After Powering ON
*2
15.0 seconds or less
Returning from the Sleep mode
1.6 seconds or less
First Print Time
Approx. 5.2 seconds
(A4)
Print Speed
28.0 sheets/minute
*3
(Plain A4, 100%)
Paper Feeding System/Capacity Drawer
*4
● Plain (60 to 80 g/m²): 250 sheets
● Plain (81 to 90 g/m²): 170 sheets
● Heavy (91 to 105 g/m²): 170 sheets
● Heavy (106 to 163 g/m²): 100 sheets
● Bond: 100 sheets
315
Available Paper(P. 318) ."
Appendix
● Recycled: 100 sheets
● Labels: 100 sheets
● Envelope: 10 sheets
● Index Card: 50 sheets
Multi-Purpose Tray
1 sheet
Paper Output System/Capacity Output Tray
*4
100 sheets (68 g/m²)
Power Source
220 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption
Maximum Power Consumption
*2
1,120 W or less
During Sleep Mode
● Approx. 0.6 W (USB connection)
● Approx. 0.7 W (wired LAN connection)
● Approx. 0.5 W (wireless LAN connection)
With the Main Power Turned OFF
0.1 W or less
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
371 x 404 x 225 mm
Weight
Main Unit *5
Approx. 7.0 kg
Consumables
Consumables(P. 258)
Installation Space
371 x 618 x 363 mm
*6
(W x D x H)
Memory Capacity
RAM: 256 MB
Environmental Conditions
Temperature: 10 to 30°C
Humidity: 20 to 80% RH (no condensation)
*1Including
*2May
multi-purpose tray
vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.
*3Print
speed is measured based on internal testing using A4 size paper printed with 100% print ratio to original on onesided paper. Internal testing involved continuously printing the same one page of content on plain paper. Print speed
may vary depending on paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.
The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of
a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous printing.
*4May
*5The
vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.
toner cartridge and the drum cartridge are not included.
316
Appendix
*6When
all of the front cover, back cover and toner cover are opened.
317
Appendix
Available Paper
29UE-064
The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.
◼ Supported Paper Sizes
: Available
Paper Sizes
: Unavailable
Drawer Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1
A4
B5
A5 *2
A6 *3
Legal
Letter
Statement
Executive
Oficio
Oficio (Brazil)
Oficio (Mexico)
Letter (Government)
Legal (Government)
Foolscap
Foolscap (Australia)
Legal (India)
3x5inch
318
Appendix
Paper Sizes
Drawer Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1
F4A
Envelope No. 10 (COM10)
Envelope Monarch
Envelope C5
Envelope DL
Custom
*4
*1Automatic
*2If
*4
2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
feeding in landscape orientation, can be specified only from the printer driver.
*3Available
*4The
only from the printer driver.
custom size ranging from 76.2 x 127.0 mm to 215.9 x 355.6 mm is available.
◼ Supported Paper Types
Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.
: Available
: Unavailable
Paper Type
Drawer Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1
Plain
71 to 89 g/m²
*2
Plain L
61 to 70 g/m²
*2
Plain L2
60 g/m²
*2
Heavy 1
90 to 105 g/m²
*2
Heavy 2
106 to 120 g/m²
Heavy 3
121 to 163 g/m²
Heavy 4 *3
121 to 163 g/m²
Recycled
71 to 89 g/m²
*2
Bond 1
60 to 104 g/m²
*2
Bond 2
105 to 163 g/m²
319
Appendix
Paper Type
Index Card
Drawer Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1
121 to 163 g/m²
Labels
Envelope
Envelope H *4
*1Automatic
*2Usable
2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.
paper sizes are A4, Legal, Letter, Oficio, Oficio (Brazil), Oficio (Mexico), Legal (India), Foolscap/Folio, and F4A.
*3When
using paper of 121 to 163 g/m² with <Heavy 3> specified, select this paper type if toner is not fully fixed and the
printouts are faded.
*4Select
this paper type if toner is not fully fixed and the printouts are faded when the paper type is set to <Envelope>.
320
Appendix
Printer Functions
29UE-065
◼ UFR II-LT Printer Function
Type
Internal
Print Size
Available Paper(P. 318)
Print Speed
Main Unit(P. 315)
Resolution
Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II-LT
Protocol Supported
Network Environment(P. 325)
Compatible OS
Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016, Mac OS X
v10.8.5 to macOS 10.13.x
Resident Fonts
None
Interface
USB
USB1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
100Base-TX/10Base-T(IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
◼ PCL Printer Function
Type
Internal
Print Size
Available Paper(P. 318)
Print Speed
Main Unit(P. 315)
Resolution
Data Processing
1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi
Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6/PCL5e
321
Appendix
Protocol Supported
Network Environment(P. 325)
Compatible OS
Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2008/Windows Server
2008 R2/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows Server 2016, Mac OS X
v10.8.5 to macOS 10.13.x
Resident Fonts
45 fonts
Interface
USB
USB1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed
Wired LAN
100Base-TX/10Base-T(IEEE 802.3 compliant)
Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
322
Appendix
Management Functions
29UE-066
◼ Firewall Settings
● Up to 4 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specified for both IPv4 and IPv6.
● Up to 10 MAC addresses can be specified.
◼ Registration of Keys and Certificates
● If you install a key or CA certificate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:
● PKCS#12
Format
● CA certificate: X.509 DER, PEM
File extension
Public key algorithm
(and key length)
Certificate signature algorithm
● Key: ".p12", ".pfx"
● CA certificate: ".cer"
RSA (512 bits*1, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits), ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)
SHA1-RSA*2, SHA256-RSA, SHA384-RSA*3, SHA512-RSA*3, MD5-RSA*4, MD2-RSA*4, SHA1ECDSA*2, SHA256-ECDSA, SHA384-ECDSA, SHA512-ECDSA
Certificate thumbprint algorithm SHA1
*1The
signature algorithm is available only for SHA1-RSA or SHA256-RSA.
*2Available
only for a generated key and certificate signature request (CSR) or installation from the Remote UI.
*3Available
only when the key algorithm is 1024 bits or more.
*4Available
only for installation from the Remote UI.
● The machine does not support use of a certificate revocation list (CRL).
323
Appendix
System Environment
29UE-067
System Requirements for the Remote UI *1 Windows
● Windows Vista/7/8.1/10
● Microsoft Internet Explorer 11 and later
● Microsoft Edge
macOS
● Mac OS X 10.6 and later
● Safari 3.2.1 and later
iOS
● Safari
Android
● Chrome
System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows
● Internet Explorer 9 and later
● Microsoft Edge
● Firefox
● Firefox ESR
● Chrome*2
macOS
● Safari
● Firefox
● Chrome*2
Linux
● Firefox
iOS
● Safari*2
Android
● Chrome*2
*1Before
*2Only
changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.
when viewing manuals on the Internet
324
Appendix
Network Environment
29UE-068
◼ Common Specifications
Protocol Supported
Communication Protocol
TCP/IP (Frame type: Ethernet II)
Printing Protocol
● LPD
● RAW
● IPP
● IPPS
● WSD
● Mopria
● Google Cloud Print
● AirPrint
● Windows10 Mobile Print
◼ Wired LAN Specifications
Interface
10Base-T, 100Base-TX (RJ-45)
◼ Wireless LAN Specifications
Standard
IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
Transmission Scheme
IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)
IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)
IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)
Frequency Range
2.412 to 2.472 GHz
Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitte 15.9 dBm
Communication Mode
● Infrastructure Mode
● Access Point Mode
Security (encryption method)
Infrastructure Mode
● 128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP
● WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
● WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)
Access Point Mode
325
Appendix
WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)
Connection Method
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup
326
Appendix
Manuals and Their Contents
29UE-069
The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.
Getting Started
Read this manual first. It describes basic setup procedures, from removing the
packing materials to setting up the machine.
User's Guide (This Manual)
This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed
using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a
keyword to search for pages on a specific topic. Using User's Guide(P. 328)
327
Appendix
Using User's Guide
29UE-06A
The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the
functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly find the page you are
looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify
how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.
◼ Screen Layout of User's Guide
This section describes the screens configuring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons.
Layout of User's Guide(P. 329)
Screen
◼ Viewing User's Guide
This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and
the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information
contained in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 332)
◼ Specifying How the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks
You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to fit to the device you use to
view the User's Guide.
● If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as
PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.
How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for
Search the contents
● You can find the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the
screen.
Search by keyword
● Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing
the keyword are displayed. You can find the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter
phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for
multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see
Search(P. 330) .
328
Appendix
Screen Layout of User's Guide
29UE-06C
The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.
Top Page
Appears when User's Guide is started.
/
Click
to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click
to return to the previous display.
/
Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each
click on
switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each
click on
switches between hiding and showing the display.
Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.
Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other
information.
/
Click to display the previous or following topic.
[Notice]
Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.
329
Appendix
Topic Page
Contains information about how to configure and use the machine.
Navigation
See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.
Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web
browser.
/
Click
to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click
to close the detailed descriptions.
Click to return to the page top.
Search
Click
to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and find the page
you are looking for.
330
Appendix
[Enter keyword(s) here]
to display the search results. You can search for pages
Enter a keyword or keywords and click
containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for
pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.
Search result
Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specified keywords. From the results, locate the
page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.
● The specified keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.
331
Appendix
Viewing User's Guide
29UE-06E
This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and
cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See
also these instructions.
Marks
Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and
other information are indicated using the marks below.
Indicates a warning concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to
persons if not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay
attention to these warnings.
Indicates a caution concerning operations that may lead to injury to persons if
not performed correctly. To use the machine safely, always pay attention to
these cautions.
Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,
and make sure not to perform the described operations.
Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these
items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the
machine or property.
Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for
a procedure.
Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.
Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual
Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:
Type
Example
Keys on the operation panel
/
/
/
<Timer Settings>
<Paper jammed.>
Settings displayed on the operation panel
Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]
/
/
,
, and
on the operation panel are used to select the target item in settings, but their description is
omitted in the User's Guide. The operation for selecting <XXXXX> using
represented as shown below in the User's Guide.
1
Select <XXXXX>.
332
or
and pressing
is
Appendix
Computer Screens Used in This Manual
Depending on the model or operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual
may slightly differ from the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending
on their version.
Illustrations Used in This Manual
The illustrations of the toner cartridge are those for the Canon Toner Cartridge 051.
333
Appendix
Basic Windows Operations
29UE-06H
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 334)
Enabling [Network discovery](P. 334)
Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 335)
Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 336)
Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 336)
Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 337)
Checking the Printer Port(P. 338)
Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 339)
Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 340)
When Printing from the Windows Store App(P. 341)
● Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.
◼ Displaying the Printer Folder
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel]
[Printer].
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Devices and Printers].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel]
Windows 10
[ ] select [Windows System]
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel]
select [Control Panel]
[View devices and printers].
[View devices and printers].
[Control Panel]
[Hardware and Sound]
[Devices and Printers].
double-click [Printers].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel]
[Hardware]
[Devices and Printers].
◼ Enabling [Network discovery]
Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.
Windows Vista
[Start] select [Control Panel]
[Network discovery].
[View network status and tasks]
Windows 7/Server 2008 R2
[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
select [Turn on network discovery] under
[Change advanced sharing settings]
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
334
Appendix
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
[Change advanced sharing
Windows 10
[ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center]
discovery] under [Network discovery].
Windows Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]
settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].
[Change advanced
select [Turn on network
[Change advanced sharing
◼ Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server
1
Open Windows Explorer.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs]
[Accessories]
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [File Explorer].
[Windows Explorer].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
select [File Explorer].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].
2
Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].
● To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for
computers.
➠ Shared printers are displayed.
335
Appendix
◼ Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen
If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided CDROM/DVD-ROM, follow the procedure below. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual.
The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using.
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start]
enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and files] or [Start Search]
press the [ENTER] key.
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
[Run]
Enter "D:\MInst.exe"
click [OK]
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start]
[Run]
Enter "D:\MInst.exe"
click [OK]
Windows 10
Enter "D:\MInst.exe" in the search box
click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
Windows Server 2016
Click [
]
enter "D:\MInst.exe"
click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.
◼ Printing a Test Page in Windows
You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.
1
Load A4 size paper in the drawer.
2
Open the printer folder.
3
Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 97)
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 334)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
336
Appendix
4
Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.
➠ The test page is printed.
◼ Checking the Bit Architecture
If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.
1
Display [Control Panel].
Windows Vista/7/Server 2008
[Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 8/Server 2012
Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen
select [Control Panel].
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].
Windows 10/Server 2016
Proceed to step 2.
2
Display [System].
337
Appendix
Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012
Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security]
Windows 10/Server 2016
Click [ ] [Settings] [System]
[System].
select [About].
Windows Server 2008
Double-click [System].
3
Check the bit architecture.
For 32-bit versions
[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.
For 64-bit versions
[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.
◼ Checking the Printer Port
1
2
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 334)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
338
Appendix
3
In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.
If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address
● If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer are on the
same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard
TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port. Configuring Printer Ports(P. 50)
◼ Checking Bidirectional Communication
1
2
Open the printer folder.
Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 334)
Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or
[Properties].
339
Appendix
3
In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is
selected.
◼ Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected
If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click
SSID of the connected wireless LAN router.
340
,
,
, or
in the system tray to display the
Appendix
◼ When Printing from the Windows Store App
Windows Server 2012
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2
Display the charms on the right side of the screen
[Print]
Windows 10
Tap or click [Print] on the application
Tap or click [Devices]
The driver that you use
Tap or click [Devices]
[Print]
The driver that you use
[Print]
The driver that you use
[Print]
● If you print using this method, only a limited number of print settings are available.
● If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to
the desktop and follow the instructions in the displayed dialog box. This message appears when the machine
is set to display the user name during printing and similar instances.
341
Appendix
Notice
29UE-06J
◼ IPv6 Ready Logo
The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1
established by the IPv6 Forum.
◼ WEEE and Battery Directives
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE
Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, in accordance with the Battery Directive, this
indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb = Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a
concentration above an applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when
you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible
impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural
resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your local city office, waste authority,
approved scheme or your household waste disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or www.canoneurope.com/battery.
◼ Environmental Information
Reducing your environmental impact while saving money
Power Consumption and Activation Time
The amount of electricity a device consumes depends on the way the device is used. This product is designed and set
in a way to allow you to reduce your electricity costs. After the last print it switches to Ready Mode. In this mode it can
print again immediately if required. If the product is not used for a time, the device switches to its Power Save Mode.
The devices consume less power (Watt) in these modes.
If you wish to set a longer Activation Time or would like to completely deactivate the Power Save Mode, please
consider that this device may then only switch to a lower energy level after a longer period of time or not at all.
Canon does not recommend extending the Activation Times from the optimum ones set as default.
Energy Star ®
The Energy Star® programme is a voluntary scheme to promote the development and purchase of energy efficient
models, which help to minimise environmental impact.
Products which meet the stringent requirements of the Energy Star® programme for both environmental benefits and
the amount of energy consumption will carry the Energy Star® logo accordingly.
Paper types
342
Appendix
This product can be used to print on both recycled and virgin paper (certified to an environmental stewardship
scheme), which complies with EN12281 or a similar quality standard. In addition it can support printing on media
down to a weight of 64g/m².
Lighter paper means less resources used and a lower environmental footprint for your printing needs.
Duplex printing (Standard duplex printing products only)
Duplex printing capability enables you to print on both sides automatically, and therefore helps to reduce the use of
valuable resources by reducing your paper consumption.
The duplex function has been auto enabled during the set up and driver installation and Canon strongly recommends
that you do not disable this function. You should continue to use the duplex function to reduce the environmental
impact of your work with this product at all times.
◼ Disclaimers
● The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
● CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR
EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.
◼ Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or
other countries.
Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.
Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.
This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.
UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Office and may
be registered in certain jurisdictions.
UFST: Copyright © 1989 - 1996, 1997, 2003, 2004, 2008, all rights reserved, by Monotype Imaging Inc.
Portions of this software are copyright © 2007 The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.
◼ Copyright
Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.
◼ Legal Limitations on the Usage of Your Product and the Use of Images
Using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce certain documents, and the use of such images as scanned,
printed or otherwise reproduced by your product, may be prohibited by law and may result in criminal and/or civil
liability. A non-exhaustive list of these documents is set forth below. This list is intended to be a guide only. If you are
uncertain about the legality of using your product to scan, print or otherwise reproduce any particular document,
and/or of the use of the images scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced, you should consult in advance with your
legal advisor for guidance.
● Paper Money
● Travelers Checks
● Money Orders
● Food Stamps
343
Appendix
● Certificates of Deposit
● Passports
● Postage Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
● Immigration Papers
● Identifying Badges or Insignias
● Internal Revenue Stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
● Selective Service or Draft Papers
● Bonds or Other Certificates of Indebtedness
● Checks or Drafts Issued by Governmental Agencies
● Stock Certificates
● Motor Vehicle Licenses and Certificates of Title
● Copyrighted Works/Works of Art without Permission of Copyright Owner
V_180517
344
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,
Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
----------------------------------------------------------SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007
----------------------------------------------------------PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide
development of collaborative font projects, to support the font
creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to
provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and
improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and
redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The
fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,
redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved
names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,
however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The
requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to
any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by the Copyright
Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may
include source files, build scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified as such after the
copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software
components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).
"Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,
deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the
components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting
the Font Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical
writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,
modify, redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the
Font Software, subject to the following conditions:
345
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in
Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be
included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or
binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user.
3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the
corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any
Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written
permission.
5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any document created using
the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
346
The Software Subjected to the Other License Conditions
Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding
license conditions.
Table of Software
Names of Software
Terms and Conditions of the
License:
See Page
bldimake
2
FreeType
3
snmp
8
Incl
11
JPEG
12
math
13
mDNSResponder
14
mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared)
18
OpenSSL
19
xpm
23
-1-
bldimake
Copyright (c) 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988 The Open Group
All right Reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is
hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. The above copyright
notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open
Group.
-2-
FreeType
The FreeType Project LICENSE
---------------------------2006-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction
============
The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages;
some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine,
various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files found in such packages, and
which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license
affects thus the FreeType
font engine, the test programs,
documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
This license
was inspired by the BSD,
Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion
and use of free software in commercial and freeware products
alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution)
o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or
full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage)
o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use
it, or
only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge
-3-
somewhere in your documentation that you have used the
FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this
software, with or without modifications, in commercial products.
We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and
assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a
credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus
encourage you to use the following text:
"""
Portions of this software are copyright © <year> The FreeType
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
"""
Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you
actually use.
Legal Terms
===========
0. Definitions
-------------Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project',
and `FreeType archive' refer to
the set of files originally
distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha,
beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where
`using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source
code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'.
This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType
-4-
engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the original
FreeType Project,
including all source
code, binaries and
documentation, unless otherwise stated
in the file in
its
original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive.
If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by
this license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below.
1. No Warranty
-------------THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
2. Redistribution
----------------This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and
irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile,
display, copy,
create derivative works
of, distribute and
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code
forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to
authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted
herein, subject to the following conditions:
o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file
(`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to
the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.
The copyright
notices of the unaltered,
-5-
original files must be preserved in all copies of source
files.
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of the work of the
FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on
the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files.
If you use
our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid
to us.
3. Advertising
-------------Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use
the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional
purposes without specific prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the
following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation
or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not required to
accept it.
However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted
material, only this license, or another one contracted with the
authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it.
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType
Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
4. Contacts
----------There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
-6-
o freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as
future and wanted additions to the library and distribution.
If you are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the documentation.
o freetype-devel@nongnu.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues,
specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at
http://www.freetype.org
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
-7-
snmp
Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU not be
used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
software without specific, written prior permission.
CMU DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL
CMU BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR
ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
-8-
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
-9-
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
Copyright 1988, 1989 by Carnegie Mellon University
Copyright 1989 TGV, Incorporated
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its
documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and TGV not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific, written prior permission.
CMU AND TGV DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO
EVENT SHALL CMU OR TGV BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF
USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
- 10 -
Incl
Copyright (c) 1994-96 SunSoft, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT INC. OR ITS
PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from SunSoft, Inc.
- 11 -
JPEG
"this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.".
- 12 -
math
Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is
preserved.
copysignf.c:*
Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
math_private.h:*
Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
powf.c:*
Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
scalbnf.c:*
Copyright (c) 1993 by Sun Microsystems, Inc. All rights reserved.
- 13 -
mDNSResponder
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or
are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power,
direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii)
ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software
source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form,
including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media
types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License,
as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the
Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from)
the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a
whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include
works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative
Works thereof.
- 14 -
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor
for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on
behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,
verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are
managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding
communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not
a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby
grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to
reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work
and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants
to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this
section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily
infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such
Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or
counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes
direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that
Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any
medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following
conditions:
a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
c.
You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do
not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
- 15 -
d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by
the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the
NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the
NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies
with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted
for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without
any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the
terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or
product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of
the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the
Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or
conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work
and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract,
or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in
writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or
consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use
the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or
malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of
the possibility of such damages.
- 16 -
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You
may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability
obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You
agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted
against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name
and description of purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,
software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing
permissions and limitations under the License.
- 17 -
mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared)
* Copyright (c) 2003-2004, Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,
*
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,
*
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation
*
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its
*
contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this
*
software without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*/
- 18 -
OpenSSL
OpenSSL License
--------------/* ====================================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
*
the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
*
distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
*
software must display the following acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
*
endorse or promote products derived from this software without
*
prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
*
openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
*
nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
*
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
*
acknowledgment:
*
"This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
*
for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
- 19 -
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ====================================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
----------------------/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
- 20 -
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
*
notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
*
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
*
must display the following acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes cryptographic software written by
*
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
*
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
*
being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
*
the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
*
"This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
- 21 -
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
- 22 -
xpm
Copyright (c) 1989-95 GROUPE BULL
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL GROUPE BULL BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of GROUPE BULL shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from GROUPE
BULL.
- 23 -
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising